all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.60 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.31 MiB | ||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos |
1 2 | Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.60 MiB |
Part 15.21 statement
" Change or Modifications that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. "
Part 15.105 statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. if this equipment does cause harmful interference or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT 1. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS:
LG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accessories will be free from defects in material and workmanship, according to the following terms and conditions:
(1) The limited warranty for the product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the data of purchase of the product.
(2) The limited warranty extends on to the original purchaser of the product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end user.
(3) This warranty is good only to the original purchaser of the product during the warranty period as long as it is in the U.S., including Alaska, Hawaii, U.S. Territories and Canada.
(4) The external housing and cosmetic parts shall not be covered under these limited warranty terms.
(5) Upon request from LG, the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of purchase.
(6) The customer shall bear the cost of shipping the product to the Customer Service Department of LG. LG shall bear the cost of shipping the product back to the consumer after the completion of service under this limited warranty. 2. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:
(1) Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary manner.
(2) Defects or damages from abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moisture or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections, unauthorized repair, misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other acts which are not the fault of LG, including damage caused by shipping blown fuses spills of food or liquid.
(3) Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship.
(4) That the Customer Service Department at LG was net notified by consumer of the alleged defect or malfunction of the product during the applicable limited warranty period.
(5) Products which have had the serial number removed or made illegible.
(6) The limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied either in fact or by operations law, statutory or otherwise, including, but limited to any implied warranty of marketability or fitness for a particular use.
(7) Damage resulting from use of non-LG approved accessories.
(8) All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normal customer use.
(9) Products operated outside published maximum ratings. 3
(10) Products used or obtained in a rental program.
(11) Consumables (such as fuses). 3. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
No other express warranty is applicable to this product. THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY, IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN. LG INFOCOMM INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES, DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL, RISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusive of imitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts; so these limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. 4. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:
To obtain warranty service, please call the following web address:
www.lgeservice.com For Your Safety Important Information This user guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user guide could void your warranty for this equipment. Before You Start Safety Instructions WARNING! To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your phone to high humidity areas, such as the bathroom, swimming pool, etc. Always store your phone away from heat. Never store your phone in settings that may expose it to temperatures less than 32F or greater than 104F, such as outside during extreme weather conditions or in your car on a hot day. Exposure to excessive cold or heat will result in malfunction, damage and/or catastrophic failure. Be careful when using your phone near other electronic devices. RF emissions from your mobile phone may affect nearby in adequately shielded electronic equipment. You should consult with manufacturers of any personal medical devices such as pacemakers and hearing aides to determine if they are susceptible to interference from your mobile phone. 8 Turn off your phone in a medical facility or at a gas station. Never place your phone in a microwave oven as this will cause the battery to explode. IMPORTANT! Please read the TIA SAFETY INFORMATION on page 78 before using your phone. Safety Information Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this user guide.
] Never use an unapproved battery since this could damage the phone and/or battery and could cause the battery to explode.
] Never place your phone in a microwave oven as it will cause the battery to explode.
] Do not dispose of your battery by fire or with hazardous or flammable materials.
] Make sure that no sharp-edged items come into contact with the battery. There is a risk of this causing a fire.
] Store the battery in a place out of reach of children.
] Be careful that children do not swallow any parts such as rubber plugs (earphone, connection parts of the phone, etc.). This could cause asphyxiation or suffocation. For Your Safety
] Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning storms
] Do not place any heavy items on the power cord. Do not to avoid electric shock or fire.
] When riding in a car, do not leave your phone or set up the hands-free kit near to the air bag. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag is activated, you may be seriously injured.
] Do not use a hand-held phone while driving.
] Do not use the phone in areas where its use is prohibited.
(For example: aircraft).
] Do not expose the battery charger or adapter to direct sunlight or use it in places with high humidity, such as a bathroom.
] Never store your phone in temperatures less than- 4F or greater than 122F.
] Do not use harsh chemicals (such as alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) or detergents to clean your phone. There is a risk of this causing a fire.
] Do not drop, strike, or shake your phone severely. Such actions may harm the internal circuit boards of the phone.
] Do not use your phone in high explosive areas as the phone may generate sparks.
] Do not damage the power cord by bending, twisting, pulling, or heating. Do not use the plug if it is loose as it may cause a fire or electric shock. allow the power cord to be crimped as it may cause fire or electric shock.
] Do not handle the phone with wet hands while it is being charged. It may cause an electric shock or seriously damage your phone.
] Do not disassemble the phone.
] Do not place or answer calls while charging the phone as it may short-circuit the phone and/or cause electric shock or fire.
] Only use the batteries, antennas, and chargers provided by LG. The warranty will not be applied to products provided by other suppliers.
] Only authorized personnel should service the phone and its accessories. Faulty installation or service may result in accidents and consequently invalidate the warranty.
] Do not hold or let the antenna come in contact with your body during a call.
] An emergency call can be made only within a service area. For an emergency call, make sure that you are within a service area and that the phone is turned on. 9 Body-worn Operation This device was tested for typical body-worn operations with the back of the phone kept 0.6 inches (1.5cm) between the users body and the back of the phone. To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements, a minimum separation distance of 0.6 inches(1.5cm) must be maintained between the user's body and the back of the phone. Third-party belt-clips, holsters, and similar accessories containing metallic components should not be used. Body-worn accessories that cannot maintain 0.6 inches(1.5cm) separation distance between the user's body and the back of the phone, and have not been tested for typical body-worn operations may not comply with FCC RF exposure limits and should be avoided. For Your Safety FCC RF Exposure Information WARNING! Read this information before operating the phone. In August 1996, the Federal Communications (FCC) of he United States, with its action in Report and Order FCC 96-326, adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies. The design of this phone complies with the FCC guidelines and these international standards. CAUTION Use only the supplied and approved antenna. Use of unauthorized antennas or modifications could impair call quality, damage the phone, void your warranty and/or result in violation of FCC regulations. Do not use the phone with a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with skin, a minor burn may result. Contact your local dealer for a replacement antenna. 10 Vehicle Mounted External Antenna
(optional, if available) A minimum separation distance of 8 inches (20cm) must be maintained between the user/bystander and the vehicle mounted external antenna to satisfy FCC RF exposure requirements. For more information about RF exposure, visit the FCC website at www.fcc.gov FCC Part 15 Class B Compliance This device and its accessories comply with part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device and its accessories may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device and its accessories must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Cautions for Battery
] Do not disassemble.
] Do not short-circuit.
] Do not expose to high temperature: 60C (140F).]
] Do not incinerate. For Your Safety Battery Disposal
] Please dispose of your battery properly or bring to your local wireless carrier for recycling.
] Do not dispose in fire or with hazardous or flammable materials. Adapter (Charger) Cautions
] Using the wrong battery charger could damage your phone and void your warranty.
] The adapter or battery charger is intended for indoor use only. Do not expose the adapter or battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in places with high humidity, such as the bathroom. 11 DoCoMo W-CDMA, GSM/GPRS system Thank you for purchasing the FOMA L602i. Before or during use of the FOMA L602i, make sure that you read this manual and the separate manuals such as for the battery pack thoroughly so that you can use the FOMA L602i correctly. If you feel any inconvenience in reading the manual, contact the DoCoMo Information Center listed on the back of this manual. The FOMA L602i is designed to be your close partner. Treat it carefully at all times to ensure long-term performance. Before using your FOMA phone Because the FOMA phones use radio waves, they cannot be used in places where radio waves do not reach, such as inside tunnels, underground, or in buildings; or the outside where radio waves are weak or out of the FOMA service area. They may not be used in the high-rise buildings even when the antennas are unobstructed. You may also experience interruption of calls even when using without moving while the radio waves are strong enough for the 3 antennas to appear on the display. Use the FOMA phone carefully to avoid disturbing other people when in public, or in crowded or quiet places. Since the FOMA phones use radio waves as the medium of telecommunication, calls may be tapped by the third party. However, the W-
CDMA and GSM/GPRS systems automatically support tapping prevention, so your conversation will be incomprehensible to the third party. The FOMA phones change your voice into digital signals and send them to the other party. In places where the radio waves are weak, the digital signals may not be converted correctly, and in such a case, the voice heard may sound differently from the original voice. It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information stored in the FOMA phone and keep such notes in a safe place. DoCoMo assumes no responsibility for the loss of data stored in the phone. The user hereby agrees that the user shall be solely responsible for the result of the use of SSL. Neither DoCoMo nor the certifier listed herein makes any representation and warranty as for the security in the use of SSL. In the event that the user shall sustain damage or loss due to the use of SSL, neither DoCoMo nor the certifier assumes any responsibility for any such damage or loss. Certifier: VeriSign Japan K.K. Betrusted Japan Co., Ltd. GeoTrust Japan, inc, RAS Security Inc., and SECOM Trust Systems Co., Ltd. This FOMA phone can be used only via the FOMA network or Roaming service area of DoCoMo. For those who use the FOMA phone for the first time If this is the first time for you to use the FOMA phone, read this manual in the order as described below. Then you will get acquainted with the outline of preparing and operating procedures for using your FOMA phone. 1. Attach and then charge the battery pack. > P39, P40 2. Turn the power to the FOMA phone ON, initialize, and confirm your phone number. > P44, P45 3. Confirm the buttons on the FOMA phone for their roles. > P28 4. Confirm the meanings of icons that appear on the display. > P31 5. Confirm how to operate the menus. > P35 6. Confirm how to make and receive calls. > P48, P58 You can download the latest version of this manual from DoCoMo Web page. Manual (PDF file) download
(http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/support/manual/download/index.html) The instructions contained of this manual and URL may be changed without notice. How to Read/Refer to This Manual How to Read/Refer to This Manual The search methods and page structure of this manual are described here. Screen displays and illustrations described in this manual are for reference. The actual ones may differ. How to Refer to This Manual By the following search methods, you can find pages where your desired functions and explanations are described:
Tabs on Cover ] Cover Search from the tabs printed on the cover. Index ] P322 Search from keywords when you know the names of functions or services.
] See the next page for more details. Contents ] P4 Search from the contents that categorize functions. Features ] P6 Search from features when you want to use specific functions of FOMA L602i such as new functions or useful functions. Menu List ] P234 Search from list for menus of FOMA L602i. Quick Manual ] P332 Quick Manual gives you a clear, brief explanation about fundamental functions. You can take it with you when you go out. a See Overseas use (P223) for how to use your FOMA phone outside Japan. Note that FOMA L602i is referred to as FOMA phone in this manual. It is prohibited to copy all or part of this manual without permission. The instructions contained in this manual may be changed without notice. 1 How to Read/Refer to This Manual a From the Tabs on the Front Cover Search for the functions and explanations in the order of the Front Cover > First page of Chapter > Description page. Contents / Precautions Confirming before use Making Calls /
Receiving Calls Making /
ceiving videophone calls Phonebook Sound / Display Settings Safety settings Multimedia
(Camera) i-mode Mail i-appli Data box a From the Index Sound/
Sound Display 1 Ring volume 2 Effect tone volume 3 Select ringtone 4 Select effect tone 5 Vibration settings 6 Manner settings 7 Mail ring duration Select Display 1 Main display 2 Sub display 3 Font 4 Menu style 5 Backlight 6 Color scheme 7 Lighting LED Select To display the Sound menu On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(Sound) or Sound To display the Display menu On the Standby display, C[Menu] ]
(Display) or Display Adjusting the Ring Volume ....................76 Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume .........76 Setting a Ring Tone................................76 Setting an Effect Tone ...........................77 Setting a Vibrator ...................................78 Activating the Manner Mode .................78 Setting Ringing Operations for Incoming Mail ........................................80 Setting Ringing Time..............................80 Setting Main Screen...............................80 Setting Sub Display................................82 Setting Fonts of Dial Characters ...........83 Setting Menu Style .................................83 Setting Backlight ....................................83 Setting color Scheme 83 Search from the index when you know the names of functions or services. ....91 calls
.....80
.....82
...115
...109
.....36
.....63
...141
.....68 6, 148
...153
Folder list (Melody) .................177 Folder list (Moving/i-motion) ...168 Mail list (Received)..................141 Mail list (Sent).........................146 Mail list (Unsent).....................148 Software list ...........................161 Sound .........................................76 Effect tone volume ...................76 Mail ring ON/OFF .....................79 Manner mode ..........................78 Ring volume.............................76 Ringing time.............................80 Setting an Effect Tone..............77 Setting a ring tone....................76 2 How to use this manual In this manual, operations of your FOMA phone are explained in the structure as shown below:
Screen displays and illustrations described in this manual are for reference. The actual ones may differ. How to Read/Refer to This Manual Title Shows the title Shortcut operation Shows button operation from the Stand-by display. Description of functions Provides detailed explanation of each function. Supplementary description of functions Description of operations Provides the operation number and operation method. > P35 Index tab Shows the chapter title. These titles are in the tabs on the cover. How to enter the menu C 1 I C I M The above page is a sample. Supplementary description of operation Information Gives necessary information, notes, and supplementary explanation. Screen Shows the screen displayed during/
after an operation. 3 Contents/Precautions Contents Before using your FOMA phone....................... Rear side of Front Cover For those who use the FOMA phone for the first time ........................................... Rear Side of Front Cover How to Read/Refer to This Manual ...................................................... 1 Contents ............................................................................................. 4 Features of FOMA L602i...................................................................... 6 Making Full Use of FOMA L602i!.......................................................... 8 Safety Precautions (Always follow the safety precautions.)................. 10 Notes on Handling............................................................................. 20 Intellectual Property Rights ................................................................ 23 Accessories and Main Options .......................................................... 25 Confirming before use......................................... 27 Phone Parts and Functions Display Menu Operations Soft Key Operations Side Button Main Operations Using the UIM (FOMA Card) Attaching/Removing the Battery Pack Charging the FOMA Phone Turning Power ON Turning Power OFF Date/Time Using Caller ID Notification Service Own Number Making calls/Receiving calls............................... 47 Making calls Receiving calls Using Public mode (drive mode) Using Public mode (power off) Making/Receiving Video-phone calls ................. 57 About Video-phone Making Video-phone Calls Receiving Video-phone Calls Changing Settings for Video-phone Calls Phonebook........................................................... 63 Adding to Phonebook Searching for Phonebook Entries Checking the Number of Saved Phonebook Entries Setting Phonebook Setting Groups Displaying Own Number C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s 4 Sound/Display ..................................................... 75 Adjusting the Ring Volume Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume Setting a Ring Tone Setting an Effect Tone Setting a Vibrator Activating the Manner Mode Setting Ringing Operations for Incoming Mail Setting Ringing Time Setting Main Screen Setting Sub Display Setting Fonts of Dial Characters Setting Menu Style Setting Backlight Setting color Scheme Setting LED Settings ................................................................ 85 Call/Answer Call Feature Video Phone Date & Time Network (for overseas use) Changing a Host from i-mode Security Others Settings Safety settings ................................................... 103 Passwords Preventing the Phone from Activating the Operation of Function Other Safety Settings Multimedia (Camera) ......................................... 107 Notes for when using the camera Using the Camera Shooting Still Images Shooting Moving Images Setting Camera i-mode ................................................................ 119 i-mode Menu What is i-mode? Displaying the iMenu display Displaying Sites from Bookmark Displaying Screen memo Displaying Last URL Displaying Internet Web Pages Displaying MessageR/F Checking Whether Center Holds MessageR/F Setting Functions of i-mode Displaying Sites How to See/Use Sites Using My Menu Changing i-mode Password Mail..................................................................... 137 Mail Menu i-mode Mail Displaying Mail in Inbox Displaying Mail in Outbox Displaying Mail in Unsent message Composing Mail Checking New i-mode mail and Message Receiving Selected Mail Checking whether Center Holds SMS Changing Mail Setting i-appli ................................................................. 159 What is i-appli Downloading i-appli from Sites Starting i-appli Data box............................................................. 165 Introduction of Data box Displaying/Managing/Editing Images Playing back/Managing/Moving Images/i-motion Playing back/Managing/Melody Tools................................................................... 179 Using Alarm Setting the Custom Menu Using the Infrared Communication Function Using Calculator Using Unit Converter Using World Time Using Stop Watch Stationery........................................................... 189 Using Schedule Using Memo Using Date Search Using Date Counter Network Service ................................................ 197 Available Network Services Using Voice Mail Using Call Waiting Service Using Call Forwarding Service Using Nuisance Call Barring Service Using Caller ID Notification Service Using Caller ID Request Service Using Set Arrival Act Selecting Arrival Call Act Setting Remote Control International Roaming Service Registering Additional Services Registering Additional Guidance Using English Guidance Using Service Dialing Number Using Call Barring C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Contents/Precautions Data Transmission............................................. 209 Data Transmission Available from the FOMA phone Before Use Glossary of Data Transmission Terms Preparation Flow for Data Transmission AT command Entering Characters........................................... 215 Entering Characters List of Character Assignment of Dial Buttons Overseas Use..................................................... 223 International Roaming Service Setting the Network Mode Confirming Before Using Overseas Using the FOMA Phone Overseas Appendix............................................................ 233 Menu list Pre-installed data Symbol/Special Character List Pictograph and Emoticon List Common Phrase List Kuten Code List List of city in World time Multiaccess Combination Patterns Multitask Combination Patterns Service Available with FOMA Phones Introduction of Data Link Troubleshooting Error Messages Introduction of Options and Related Equipment Warranty and Maintenance Services Specific Absorption Rate of the Mobile Phone Export/Re-export regulations of Japan and USA Index/Quick Manual .......................................... 321 Index Quick Manual 5 Contents/Precautions FOMA is the name of the DoCoMo's service based on the W-CDMA format, authorized as one of the worlds standards for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000). Features of FOMA L602i i-mode Function Viewing sites > P130 This is on-line service to view the information via connecting the site or homepage by simply operating the button. i-mode mail > P149 You can compose and send i-mode mails. Also, you can attach images, moving images and melodies to be sent. i-motion > P135 You can obtain images and music from sites or Internet web pages. Chaku-motion/Chaku-Uta > P76 You can download i-motion from i-mode site and set it as a ring alert and/or reception image. Chaku-Uta is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc. i-motion Mail > P149, P150 You can attach moving images shot by the camera or i-
motion movies obtained from sites or Internet web pages to i-mode mail to be sent. i-mode Function i-appli > P160 You can download and use a variety of i-appli software programs from sites. For example, you can download and enjoy a variety of games. Main Futures Video-phone > P58 You can have a conversation with the other party seeing each other's face. You can also let the other partys voice heard from the speaker or the other party see the landscape around you by rotating the camera. Whole Range of Network Services Voice Mail (Charged) > P198 Call Forwarding Service (Free) > P201 Call Waiting Service (Charged) > P200 SMS (Short Messages) (Free) > P152 Nuisance Call Barring Service (Free) > P202 Caller ID Display Request (Free) > P202 C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s 6 International Roaming > P224 You can make/receive voice/video-phone calls, perform i-mode communication, exchange i-mode mail and SMS messages and perform data transmission with a personal computer connected to your FOMA phone overseas with the same phone number. Moreover, subscribers of the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service can use the network services. Camera Functions > P109, P115 You can shoot still images and moving images using the rotatable camera (1,300,000 effective pixels and 1,300,000 recording pixels). You can shoot not only a person or landscape but also yourself by rotating the camera. You can use various functions such as adjusting images, zooming images, special effects when you shoot images. Using the Infrared Communication > P182 You can exchange the data with FOMA handset via Infrared. To display a character in phonebook > P64 In a phonebook, you can set the image and the character for each entry. You can make your own character by changing Face, Hair, Tops, Bottoms, Accessory and Scenery. Contents/Precautions C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Useful Functions for Overseas Use Unit converter > P185 You can convert a value of currency, surface, length, weight, temperature, capacity or velocity from one unit to another. You can use Unit converter in confirming a price converted into yen when you shop overseas. World time > P187 You can check the date and time of 58 cities in the world. Also, a world map is displayed so that you can confirm the locations of cities and the national flags. You can use Global Clock in confirming the date and time and the location of your next destination on a trip. Dual clock display > P81 You can display the time of two cities on the Stand-by display at the same time. For example, you can view the time difference by setting the city of a stay place. 7 Contents/Precautions Making Full Use of FOMA L602i!
"Video-phone", communication seeing each other's face. > P58 C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s 8 Contents/Precautions Simple and Easy Camera Function > P108 C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s 9 Contents/Precautions C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Safety Precautions
(Always follow the safety precautions.) a Before using the FOMA phone, read these safety precautions carefully so that you can use it correctly. After reading the precautions, keep them in a safe place for future reference. a Be sure to observe these safety precautions because they are designed to protect you or persons around you from causing injury and to avoid damages to the property. a The symbols below indicate the levels of danger or damage that can be caused if the particular precautions are not observed. Danger Warning Caution This symbol indicates that incorrect handling will almost certainly cause death or serious injury. This symbol indicates that incorrect handling poses a risk of causing death or serious injury. This symbol indicates that incorrect handling poses a risk of causing injury or damage to the product or property. 10 a The following symbols show specific directions:
Denotes things not to do (Prohibition). Denotes not to disassemble. Denotes not to touch with wet hands. Denotes not to use where it could get wet. Dont Do not disassemble No wet hands Avoid water Denotes mandatory instructions (matters that must be complied with). Do Denotes to pull the power from the outlet. Pull the power plug out a Safety Precautions are divided into the following 6 sections:
General precautions for FOMA phone, batteries, adapters/chargers and UIM ................................ P11 Precautions for FOMA phone ............................. P13 Precautions for batteries ..................................... P15 Precautions for adapters/chargers ...................... P17 Precautions for UIM ............................................ P18 Notes on using near electronic medical equipment.............................................. P19 General precautions for FOMA phone, batteries, adapters/chargers, and UIM Do Danger Use only the batteries and adapters /
chargers approved by DoCoMo for the FOMA phone. If you use any type of battery, adapter or charger other than the specified one, the FOMA phone, battery or other devices may leak, overheat, burst, catch fire, or get damaged. Battery Pack L02 FOMA AC Adapter 01 for both overseas and domestic usage FOMA DC Adapter 01 For other specified products, contact a handling FOMA AC Adapter 01 counter such as a DoCoMo shop. Do not disassemble Do not disassemble, modify or solder the FOMA phone or accessories. Accidents such as fire, injury, electric shock, or malfunction may result. The battery fluid may leak, overheat, bust or catch fire. Contents/Precautions Do not use or leave the FOMA phone or accessories in places where it is exposed to direct sunlight, or in extremely high temperatures such as inside a car in the summer heat. Otherwise, the devices may deform or malfunction, battery fluid may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire, or performance and longevity may deteriorate. Also, part of the case may be heated, causing bare skin burns. C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Do not let the FOMA phone or accessories get wet. If liquids such as water or pet urine get onto them, overheating, electric shock, fire, malfunction, injuries or others may result. Pay attention to the place of use of the way of handling. Warning Do not use the FOMA phone near places such as gas stations where there is danger of fire or explosion. If used in dusty places or where there are flammable gases such as propane or gasoline, explosions or fire may result. Dont Avoid water Dont Next Page 11 Contents/Precautions Dont Dont Dont Warning Do not place the batteries, the FOMA phone, adapters/chargers, or UIM in microwave ovens or high-pressure containers. The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire. The FOMA phone or the adapter/charger may overheat, smoke, or catch fire, or its circuit parts may burst. Do not throw the FOMA phone or accessories, or subject them to severe shocks. The battery may leak, overheat, burst, catch fire, or cause damage to the equipment. Be careful not to let electroconductive materials (metal pieces, pencil leads, etc.) contact with the charging terminal or connector terminals. Also, make sure not to let them inside the FOMA phone. Short-circuit could cause catching fire or malfunction of the FOMA phone. Do If the FOMA phone or accessories begins to emit an odor, overheat, discolor, deform, etc., while being used, charged, or stored, take the countermeasures as follows;
C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s 12 1. Pull the power plug off the outlet or socket. 2. Turn off the FOMA phone. 3. Remove the battery pack from the FOMA phone. If you use the devices with these symptoms not handled, they may overheat, burst, or catch fire, or the battery fluid may leak. Caution If children use the FOMA phone or accessories, a guardian should explain the safety precautions and correct operations to them. The guardian should also make sure that the instructions are followed during use. Otherwise, injury may result. Do not place the FOMA phone or accessories on unstable locations such as wobbly tables or slanted locations. The FOMA phone or accessories may fall, resulting in injury or malfunction. Keep out of the reach of babies and infants. Accidental swallowing or injury may result. Do not store in humid or dusty places, or in high temperature environments. Malfunction may result. Do Dont Do Dont Do Caution Temperature of the FOMA phone, battery pack or adapter/charger may rise while charging the battery, shooting moving images, playing back or using the video phone, i-mode or i-appli repeatedly or continuously for a long time. Prolonged direct contact with a high temperature part may cause redness, itching, rash, etc. on skin depending on your physical conditions or predisposition. Be careful especially when using the FOMA phone connected to the adapter / charger continuously for a long time. Precautions for FOMA phone Do Warning Turn off the FOMA phone in places where use is prohibited as in airplanes or hospitals. Otherwise, electronic devices and electronic medical appliances may be adversely affected. If the Auto Power ON function is set, deactivate the setting, then turn the power off. For use inside medical facilities, make sure that you comply with their regulations. C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Contents/Precautions You may be punished for using the FOMA phone in airplanes, which is prohibited by law. Do Turn off the FOMA phone near high-
precision electronic devices or devices using weak electronic signals. The FOMA phone may possibly cause these devices to malfunction. Electronic devices that may be affected:
Hearing aids, implanted cardiac pacemakers, implanted defibrillators, other medical electronic devices, fire alarms, automatic doors and other automatically controlled devices. If you are using an implanted cardiac pacemaker, implanted defibrillator or any other electronic medical device, consult the manufacturer or retailer of the device for advice regarding possible effects from the radio waves. Dont If you have any implanted electronic medical equipment, do not place your FOMA phone in a chest pocket or inner pocket. If the FOMA phone is close to electronic medical equipment, it may cause that equipment to malfunction. Next Page 13 Contents/Precautions Do Dont Dont Warning For those with weak heart conditions, the vibrator and ring volume must be adjusted carefully. Those functions may cause an effect on the heart. Do not operate the FOMA phone while driving a vehicle. Operating a mobile phone while driving has been prohibited since November 1, 2004. During driving, activate Public mode or Voice Mail. Do not directly point the infrared data port at someones eyes during transmission. His/Her eyes may possibly be affected. Other infrared devices may operate erroneously if the infrared data port is pointed at them during transmission. Do When talking on the speaker phone, be sure to keep the FOMA phone away from your ear. Otherwise, your hearing could be impaired. C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s 14 Dont Do Dont Do Do not put the FOMA phone in the place where it could be affected by an expanded airbag, etc., on the dashboard. If the airbag expands, the FOMA phone could hit you and others, causing accidents such as injury and the FOMA phone could become damaged. If thunder starts to rumble while you are using the FOMA phone outdoors, turn the power off, and move to a safe place. Otherwise, you could be struck by lightning or suffer an electric shock. Caution Do not swing the FOMA phone by its strap. The FOMA phone may hit you or persons around you, and accident such as injury or malfunction may result. Itching, rash or eczema may be caused depending on your physical conditions or predisposition. If an abnormality occurs, stop using the FOMA phone immediately, and seek medical attention. Metals are used for the following parts:
Caution Portion Earpiece/Speaker Material Aluminium Stainless ABS Sub display frame Surrounding part of Navigation button, Menu/
Select button Finishing Oxidation treatment Chromium plating Chromium plating finishing over nickel plating Dont Do Dont Do not allow liquids such as water, or foreign materials such as metal pieces or flammable materials to get into the UIM insertion slit of the FOMA phone. Fire, electric shock or malfunction may result. Electronic devices in some types of cars can be affected by use of the FOMA phone. For safetys sake, do not use the FOMA phone inside such cars. Do not place magnetic cards or similar objects near the FOMA phone or between phone parts. Information on magnetic cards such as cash cards, credit cards, telephone cards and floppy disks may be deleted. Contents/Precautions Do Be careful not to let your finger or the strap get caught when you open and close the FOMA phone. Accidents such as injury or malfunction may result. Precautions for batteries a Check the description on the label of the battery pack for the type of battery. Description Li-ion
(Li-polymer) Type Lithium-ion battery
(Lithium-polymer battery) C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Danger If the battery fluid gets into your eyes, do not rub them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately. Otherwise, the loss of eyesight may result. Do not throw the battery into fire. The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire. Do not let any metal such as a wire contact the terminal. Also, do not carry or store the battery together with a metal necklace. The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire. Do Dont Dont Next Page 15 Do If the battery fluid leaks or emits an odor, immediately stop using the battery and keep it away from fire. The battery fluid, being flammable, may catch fire and cause an explosion. Dont Caution An exhausted battery should not be disposed of with ordinary waste. The battery may catch fire or destroy the environment. After insulating the battery terminals with tape, bring them to a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop or dispose of them in accordance with local waste disposal regulations. Contents/Precautions C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Dont Dont Danger Do not pierce the battery pack with nails, hit it with a hammer, or step on it. The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire. Do not use excessive force to attach the battery to the FOMA phone when you cannot attach it successfully. Also, check that the battery is the right way round when you attach it. The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire. Warning If the battery fluid comes in contact with skin or clothes, immediately stop using the battery and wash affected areas thoroughly with clean water. The battery fluid is harmful to skin. If charging is not completed at the end of the specified charging time, stop charging. Otherwise, the battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire. Do Do 16 Precautions for adapters/chargers Dont Warning Never short-circuit the charging terminals when the adapter is plugged into the power outlet or cigarette lighter socket. Also, never touch the charging terminals with fingers or other bare skin. Fire, malfunction, electric shock or injury may result. No wet hands Do not touch the power cord of the adapter/charger, or power outlet with wet hands. Electric shock or injury may result. Do not use the AC adapter in moist places such as a bathroom. Electric shock may occur. Dont Pull the power plug out When the adapter/charger is not to be used for a long period of time, unplug the power cord from the outlet. Otherwise, electric shock, fire, or malfunction may result. Do not use a damaged adapter/charger cord or power cord. Electric shock, overheating or fire may result. Dont C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Contents/Precautions Pull the power plug out If liquids such as water get in the charger, unplug the power cord immediately from the outlet or cigarette lighter socket. Liquid inside the charger may cause electric shock, smoke, or fire. Do Do When plugging the AC adapter into the power outlet, firmly plug it in, taking care not to contact with metal straps or the like. Electric shock, short-circuit or fire may result. Use the adapter/charger at the specified VAC. Fire or malfunction may result. When using the FOMA phones overseas, use FOMA AC Adapter 01 for both overseas and domestic usage. AC adapter: 100 VAC FOMA AC Adapter for both overseas and domestic usage: 100 to 240 VAC
(Connect only to home AC outlet) DC adapter: 12/24 VDC
(For negative (-) grounded vehicles only) Do If a fuse of the DC adapter has blown, replace it with a specified fuse. Otherwise, catching fire or malfunction may result. For the specified fuse, see the users manual. Next Page 17 Contents/Precautions C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Warning The DC adapter is for use only in a negative
(-) grounded vehicle. Do not use them in a positive (+) grounded vehicle. Fire may result. Wipe the dust off the power plugs. Fire may result. Place the charger on a stable location during charging. Do not cover or wrap the charger in cloth or bedding. The FOMA phone may become separated, or the charger may overheat, leading to fire or malfunction. If it starts to thunder, do not touch the FOMA phone and adapter/charger. You may be struck by lighting or suffer an electric shock. Dont Do Dont Dont Do Always hold the plug when pulling the adapter/charger out of the power outlet or cigarette lighter socket. If you pull the plug out by the cord, the cord may be damaged, which could result in electric shock or fire. Do not place heavy objects on the adapter/charger cord and power cord. Electric shock or fire may result. Dont Precautions for UIM Caution Be careful when removing the UIM (IC portion). Your hand or finger may be injured. Do Caution Before cleaning, pull the plug from the power outlet or cigarette lighter socket. Electric shock may result. Pull the power plug out 18 Notes on using near electronic medical equipment a The description below meets Guidelines on the Use of Radio-communication Equipment such as Cellular Telephones Safeguards for Electronic Medical Equipment by the Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference Japan. Do Do Warning Turn off the phone in crowded areas such as inside trains during rush hour, as someone with an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be near you. Operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator can be affected by radio waves. Comply with the following in hospitals or health care facilities:
Do not carry the FOMA phone into operating rooms, intensive care units (ICU) or coronary care units (CCU). Turn off the FOMA phone in hospital wards. If there is any electronic medical equipment near you, turn off the FOMA phone even when in a location such as a lobby. Comply with any regulations of hospital and health care facilities instructing you not to use or carry in a mobile phone. Contents/Precautions C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Do Do If the Auto Power On function is set, deactivate the setting, then turn the power off. If you use an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator, use the mobile phone 22cm or more away from an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator. Operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be affected by radio waves. Patients using electronic medical equipment other than implanted cardiac pacemakers or implanted defibrillators (outside medical establishments for treatment at home, etc.) should check the influence of radio waves upon the equipment by consulting its manufacturer. Operation of electronic medical equipment may be affected by radio waves. 19 C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Contents/Precautions Notes on Handling General Notes a Do not let the equipment get wet. The FOMA phone, battery and adapter/charger or UIM
(FOMA card) are not waterproofed. Do not use them in which are high in humidity such as in bathrooms, and do not allow them to get wet from rain. Furthermore, if carrying them with your body, the internal parts may become corroded if exposed to body perspiration. If the parts are found to have been damaged due to exposure to the liquids, any repairs will not be covered by warranty, or repairs may not be possible. This may be repaired at your cost even if repairs are possible. a Use a dry soft cloth (lens cleaning cloth) to clean the equipment. The screen of the FOMA phone sometimes has a special coating so that it is easier to see. If you rub it roughly with a dry cloth, it may be scratched. Take care of the way of handling, and use only a dry, soft cloth such as used for cleaning glasses. When the FOMA phone is left with water drops or stains on the display, smear may be generated or its coating may be peeled off. Do not use alcohol, thinner, benzene, detergent or other solvents for cleaning, otherwise the printing may be removed or discoloration may result. 20 a Occasionally clean the connector terminals of the equipment using a dry cotton swab. If the connector terminal becomes soiled, the connection may deteriorate so that the power goes off or the battery does not charge fully. Wipe the connector terminal with a dry cloth or cotton swab. a Do not place the FOMA phone near an air conditioner outlet. Condensation may form due to rapid changes in temperature, and this may corrode internal parts and cause malfunction. a Do not place the FOMA phone in places where it may be subjected to excessive force. Do not place the FOMA phone in a bag along with many other articles or in a trouser pocket, because this can damage the LCD display and internal circuitry. Malfunctions caused by such damage are not covered by the warranty. a Do carefully read each instruction manual attached to the battery pack or adapter/charger. Notes on handling the FOMA phone a Avoid using in extremely high or low temperatures. The FOMA phone should be used within a temperature range from 5 C to 35C and a humidity from 45% to 85%. a The FOMA phone, if operated near ordinary phones, televisions or radios that are in use, may affect them. You should operate your FOMA phone as far away from such equipment as possible. a It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information stored in the FOMA phone and keep such notes in a safe place. DoCoMo assumes no responsibility for any loss of the stored data items. a Do not sit with the FOMA phone in your trousers or skirts pocket. Do not place the FOMA phone under heavy objects in a bag. Malfunction may result. a Make sure that nothing, such as a strap, gets caught between the parts of the FOMA phone when you close it. Malfunction or breakage may result. a The FOMA phone becomes warm while using or charging, but this is not an abnormality. Use the FOMA phone as it is. a Do not leave the FOMA phone with a camera pointing direct to the sunlight. Pixels may be discolored or burns may result. C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Contents/Precautions Notes on handling batteries a Batteries have a limited life. If the usable time of your FOMA phone is extremely short even if the battery is fully charged, replace the battery. Make sure that you only buy the specified battery. a Charge the battery in a place with an ambient temperature from 5C to 35C. a Make sure that the battery is charged when you use the FOMA phone for the first time. a When the FOMA phone has been left unused for a long period of time, charge the battery pack before using, or the battery may be easily exhausted. a The usable time of the battery varies depending on the usage environment or its remaining life. a Though the battery pack may swell a little as it comes closer to the end of its service life under some conditions, it is not a problem. a Store the batteries in a well ventilated place out of direct sunlight. When the battery is not to be used for a long period of time, unplug the power cord from the FOMA phone or adapter (including charger) with the battery power completely drained, and store it in the plastic bag wrapping the battery pack. Next Page 21 Contents/Precautions C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Notes on handling chargers and adapters a Charge the battery in a place with an ambient temperature from 5C to 35C. a Charge the battery where:
There is excessive humidity, vibration, and dust. There are no ordinary phones, television sets or radios nearby. a During charging, the adapter or charger may become warm. This is not an abnormality, so continue charging. a Do not use the DC Adapter for charging the battery when the car engine is not running. The car battery could go flat. a When using the power outlet having the disengaging prevention mechanism, observe the instructions given in that instruction manual. a Do not give a strong shock. Also, do not deform the charging terminal. Malfunction may result. Notes on handling the UIM a Do not apply more than necessary force when detaching the UIM. a Do not apply more than necessary force when inserting it into the phone. 22 a The UIM may become warm during use, but this is not a sign of a malfunction. Continue using it as it is. a The warranty does not cover damage caused by inserting the UIM into some other of IC card reader/writer. a Always keep the IC portion clean. a Use a dry soft cloth to clean the equipment. a It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information stored on the UIM and keep such notes in a safe place. DoCoMo assumes no responsibility for any loss of the stored data items. a For the environmental protection, bring any unneeded UIMs to a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. a Avoid using in extremely high or low temperatures. a Do not damage, carelessly touch, or short-
circuit the IC. Data may be lost or damage to the IC may result. a Do not drop the UIM or subject it to strong impacts. Malfunction may result. a Do not bend the UIM or place heavy objects on it. Malfunction may result. Notes on handling the Camera You may be imposed punishment according to the law and rule (such as nuisance prevention ordinance) if you use the FOMA phone to give a remarkable nuisance and misdeed to the public. Please respect the privacy of individuals around you when taking and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile phones. Intellectual Property Rights Copyrights and Rights of Portrait You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the contents of which a third party holds the copyright such as text, images, music, or software downloaded from web pages on the Internet, or images shot by the cameras of this product without permission from the copyright holder except for when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed by the Copyright Law. Note that it may be prohibited to shoot or record live performances or exhibitions even for personal use. Make sure that you refrain from taking portraits of other persons and distributing such portraits over the Internet without consent, as this violates portrait rights. Contents/Precautions Trademarks FOMA, mova, i-mode, i-appli, i-motion, i-motion Mail, MessageF, i-melody, mopera, mopera U, WORLD CALL, WORLD WING, Deco-mail Public mode, My DoCoMo and the logos of FOMA, i-mode, and i-appli are trademarks or registered trademarks of NTT DoCoMo, Inc. The Free Dial Service name and its logo are trademarks of C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s NTT Communications. Multitask is a trademark of the NEC Corporation. Catch phone (Call Waiting Service) is a registered trademark of Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation. Java and Java related trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Chaku-Uta is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc. NetFront and are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co.,Ltd. In Japan and other countries. Microsoft, MS, and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Windows XP is abbreviation of Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system or Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition operating system. Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system. 23 Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307 5,490,165 5,056,109 5,504,773 5,101,501 5,506,865 5,109,390 5,511,073 5,228,054 5,535,239 5,267,261 5,544,196 5,267,262 5,568,483 5,337,338 5,600,754 5,414,796 5,657,420 5,416,797 5,659,569 5,710,784 5,778,338 Contents/Precautions C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s Sometimes transcribed like Windows XP or 2000. Other company names and product names described in the text are trademarks or registered trademarks of those companies. Others This product contains NetFront for FOMA Internet browser software of ACCESS Co., Ltd. NetFront is registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan other countries. Copyright 1996-2006 ACCESS CO., LTD.
(With Instruction Manual) Some part of the software in this product contains modules developed by Independent JPEG Group. Adobe and Acrobat Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe systems Incorporated in the US and other countries. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to encode video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard (MPEG-4 Video) and/or decode MPEG-4 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a licensed video provider. No license is granted or implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. 24 Contents/Precautions
<Accessories>
Accessories and Main Options L602i Handset CD-ROM for L602i
(including Warranty and Rear Cover L02)
(Manual for Data Communication (PDF file) is included.) Battery Pack L02
(With Instruction Manual) Instruction manual Quick Manual included (P332)
<Main Options>
FOMA AC Adapter 01
(With Warranty card and Instruction Manual) FOMA AC Adapter for Abroad 01
(With Warranty card and Instruction Manual) Other Options > P308 C o n t e n t s
P r e c a u t i o n s 25 Confirming before use Phone Parts and Functions .................. 28 Display ................................................... 31 Menu Operations................................... 35 Soft Key Operations.............................. 35 Side Button Main Operations ............... 36 Using the UIM (FOMA Card) ................. 37 Attaching/Removing the Battery Pack .......................................... 39 Charging the FOMA Phone................... 40 Turning Power ON................................. 44 Turning Power OFF ............................... 44 Date/Time .............................................. 45 Using Caller ID Notification Service ..... 45 Own Number.......................................... 45 27 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Confirming before use
gpOmF The Name and function of each part of the FOMA phone are as follows. This manual describes operation of each button using an illustration of the button. Phone Parts and Functions Dimensions (H x W x D):
Approx. 94 x 50 x 18 mm The height and thickness are the values of folded FOMA phone. Weight:
Approx. 93g With battery attached Antenna is embedded in the handset. 28 1 Earpiece/Speaker While talking over a call (using a speaker phone), the other partys voice is heard from here. While not talking, ring alerts and alarms are emitted from here.
: Do not put your ears close to the speaker phone being active, because it may emit loud sound. 2 Main display > P31 3 Camera For shooting still images and moving images, and for sending images on a video-phone call. Rotate the camera to take a shot.
> P58, P109, P115 4 Earphone/Microphone terminal For connecting a Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch (option), etc. Do not forcibly pull the earphone/microphone cover .
: You can rotate it forward or backward when it is open. 5 MMail button Press from the Stand-by display to bring up the Mail menu. > P138 Press from the Stand-by display for 2 or more seconds to check new message. > P127, P154 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Confirming before use 6 KNavigation button For selecting an item and scrolling the display. The following operations can be performed from the Stand-by display:
UUp button
: The phonebook list screen appears.
> P67 DDown button : The custom menu screen appears. LLeft button
> P182
: Received call screen appears.
> P86 Press for 1 or more seconds to display the received mail list. > P88 RRight button : Redialed call screen appears.
> P87 Press for 1 or more seconds to display the sent mail list. > P88 7 TVideo-phone button Press to make/receive video-phone calls. > P58, P60 Press on the Stand-by display to view the other party that you made the latest call. Press to switch modes, etc. in entering mode
(Pictograph/Symbol/Emoticon). > P217 Press to rotate the image when you start the camera. 8 CMenu/Select button Press on the Stand-by display to bring up the Main menu. > P35 An operation displayed in the soft key area can be performed. > P35 Next Page 29 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Confirming before use
gpOmF 9 AStart button
% NMultitask button Press to make/receive voice calls. > P48, P50 Press on the Stand-by display to view the other party that you made the latest call. Press for 1 or more seconds to display all received/sent mail history. Press while characters are entered to switch between full-pitch and half-pitch. > P216
! Dial button
" * (asterisk) button Press to enter and to switch between upper case and lower case while characters are entered. > P218 On the stand-by display, press this key for 1 or more seconds to set or cancel Public mode (drive mode).
> P51
# Microphone For speaking to the other party. For recording sound when shooting moving images by the camera.
$ Ii-mode button Press from the Stand-by display to bring up the i-
mode menu. > P120 Press for 2 or more seconds from the Stand-by display to bring up software list screen of i-appli.
> P161 Press from the entering character mode to switch the mode (Hiragana/Katakana/English/ Number) An operation displayed in the soft key area can be performed. > P35 30 Press to bring up the Task Manager. Press for 1 or more seconds to bring up the New Task screen. > P280
& QClear button Press to return to the previous operation. Press to cancel the operation depending on the function such as sending mails or downloading data. Also, press to delete entered text. Note that the operation may not be canceled depending on the timing of canceling.
( PPower/End button Press for 1 or more seconds to turn the power on. Press for 1 or more seconds to turn the power off.
> P44 Press to end calls and end functions.
) #(Sharp)/ Manner Mode button Press for 1 or more seconds from the Stand-by display to activate/deactivate the Manner Mode.
> P78 Also, press to enter # and to start a new line while characters are entered.
~ Connector terminal For connecting adapters and cables.
+ Sub display > P33
, LED You can set LED to go ON when making/receiving a call, playing music or doing other operations. > P84 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e
- Strap hole
. Rear cover
/ Infrared data port Point this port to the other device for infrared communication. > P182
: FEVolume buttons 1. For adjusting the keypad volume in idle mode >
P36 2. For adjusting the volume during a call > P36
; GCamera button Press from the Stand-by display to start up a camera.
> P109 Display Main Display 1 234 5 6 7 8 9 ! " #
$ % & ( ) Confirming before use 1
: Shows the level of the received radio waves. Strong Weak
: Out of the service area. 2 : Displayed during a voice call.
: Displayed during a video-phone call.
: Displayed during a voice call using the speaker phone. 3 (Blinks): while i-mode is activated.
(Blinks): during i-mode communication.
: Displayed during trying dialup connection.
: Displayed during dialup connection.
: Displayed while an SSL-enabled page is displayed or obtained. 4 : Displayed while All Call Rejection is activated. 5 : Displayed while a function (Task) is activated.
: Performing multiple functions (Task).
(Blinking): Alarm starts while talking, activating camera or setting public mode (drive mode). 6 (White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds a mail.
(Pink): Displayed when the box for i-mode mail at the i-mode Center is full.
(White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds a MessageR. Next Page 31 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Confirming before use
gpOmF
(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessageR at the i-mode Center is full.
(White): Displayed when the i-mode center holds a MessageF.
(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessageF at the i-mode Center is full.
(White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds mail, a messageR and a messageF.
(Pink): Displayed when the boxes for i-mode mail, MessageR and MessageF at the i-mode Center are full. 7 (White): Displayed when an unread mail exists.
(White): Displayed when an unread SMS message exists.
(White): Displayed when an unread mail and SMS message exist.
(Pink): Displayed when the inbox is full.
: Displayed when the area for SMS messages in the UIM is full. 8 (Yellowish green): Displayed when a Voice Mail message exists.
(Orange): Displayed when the box for Voice Mail messages is full. 9 (White): Displayed when an unread MessageR exists.
(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessageR is full.
! : Displayed when an unread MessageF exists. 32
(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessageF is full.
" : Displayed when i-appli is being started.
: Displayed when i-appli auto start failed.
: Shows the battery level.
$ (Pink): Displayed during Manner mode.
(Blue): Displayed during Original manner mode.
% : Displayed when the ringtone for incoming voice call or video-phone call sounds, not operating a vibration.
: Displayed when the vibration for incoming call is activated to Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 when the alarm for incoming voice call or video-call is muted, and the vibration operate linked with a melody.
: Displayed when a vibration and a ringtone for incoming voice call and video-phone call sounds at the same time and the vibration is set to operate linked with a melody.
: Displayed when a vibration and a ringtone from incoming voice call or video-phone call do not operate.
& : Public mode (Drive mode) active.
( : Displayed while an alarm is set.
: Displayed when todays schedule exists.
: Displayed when an alarm is set and todays C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e schedule exists.
) :Displayed when UIM is not inserted or an error occurs on the UIM. Sub Display 1 2345 6 789 1
: Shows the level of the received radio waves. Strong Weak
: Out of the service area. 2 : Displayed during a voice call.
: Displayed during a video-phone call.
: Displayed during a voice call using the speaker phone.
: Displayed during trying dialup connection.
: Displayed during dialup connection. 3 : Displayed while All Call Rejection is activated. Confirming before use 4 (White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds a mail, MessageR/F, an unread mail, SMS, MessageR/F, or the message in answering machine exists.
(Pink): Displayed when the box for mail, MessageR/F at the i-mode Center Mail, SMS, MessageR/F, or the message in answering machine is full in inbox or UIM. 5 : Displayed when an alarm is set, and blinks when an alarm starts while public mode (drive mode) is set.
: Displayed when todays schedule exists.
: Displayed when an alarm is set and todays schedule exists.
: Show the battery level. 6 7 (Pink): Manner mode active.
(Blue): Original manner mode active. 8 : In this mode, a ring alert sounds and an incoming vibrator does not operate for voice and video-
phone calls.
: In this mode, an incoming vibrator operates in Pattern 1 (Vibration only) or Pattern 2 (Vibration only) or no ring alert sounds and an incoming vibrator operates in Melody + vibration for incoming voice/video-phone calls. 33 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Confirming before use
gpOmF
: In this mode, a ring alert sounds and an incoming vibrator operates in Melody + vibration for incoming voice/video-phone calls.
: In this mode no ring alert sounds and no incoming vibrator operates for incoming voice/video-phone calls. 9 : Public mode (Drive mode) active. Subdisplay The various information such as clock or icons is displayed as follows. DoCoMo Taro
<Clock>
<Alarm>
<Incoming call>
Missed call/ New received E-mail When closing the FOMA phone, following messages are displayed on the Sub display. 1 Missed call 1 Message
<Missed call>
<New message>
When you open the FOMA phone on displaying X Missed call, you can view the time or phone number in main display. You can view the call history by pressing C. If you press I [Close], X Missed call will not be displayed anymore. When you open the FOMA phone on displaying X Message, the pop up message on the Sub display will disappear after confirming the screen. 34 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Menu Operations Soft Key Operations Confirming before use Example: How to set the Stand-by display of the Main display. a Selecting a function using K 1. On the Stand-by display, C [Menu] ] Enlarge using K ] C ] Highlight Main display using H ] Move the cursor to Stand-by display using H ] C Display Select K C Display 1 Main display 2 Sub display 3 Font 4 Menu style 5 Backlight 6 Color scheme 7 Lighting LED Select H C Main display 1 Stand-by display 2 Incoming call 3 Outgoing call Select H C a Selecting a function by pressing the key corresponding to the menu number 1. On the Stand-by display, C [Menu] ] Enlarge using K ] C ] 1 ] 1 Display Select Display 1 Main display 2 Sub display 3 Font 4 Menu style 5 Backlight 6 Color scheme 7 Lighting LED Select K C 1 Main display 1 Stand-by display 2 Incoming call 3 Outgoing call Select 1 To perform an operation displayed in the soft key area on the Main display, press the corresponding button as below. Soft key area Information
(Navigation icon) that indicates the directions in which you can scroll and select items using K is also displayed in the soft key area. Items displayed in the soft key area vary depending on the display. 35 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Confirming before use
gpOmF Side Button Main Operations a Main operations that can be performed by pressing FE/G with the FOMA phone opened FOMA phone operation Adjust the volume for moving image/melody playback Scroll the List display by page Switch the Monthly Schedule displays by month Start the camera Zoom Play back/pause moving images/a melody How to operate While moving images/a melody is played back ] FE While each List display is displayed ] FE The cursor is moved on some displays. While the Monthly Schedule display is displayed ] FE In Stand-by ] Press G While the Still or Moving imaged Finder screen is displayed ] FE Adjust the volume when playing back a moving image/melody While playing a moving image/melody ] FE When moving images/a melody is paused ] G(Play back) While moving images/a melody is played back ] G(Pause) a Major operations that can be performed by pressing FE/G with the FOMA phone closed FOMA phone operation Switch the display light of the sub display to ON Reject an incoming call How to operate In Stand-by (Switch ON/OFF) ]
FE/G Incoming call ] Press G for 1 second Adjust the volume of a ring tone for incoming call Incoming call ] FE Stop the alarm While an alarm / schedule alarm is sounding ] Press E Adjust the volume of a ring tone for incoming call Adjust the volume of key tone Adjust the volume Incoming call ] FE In Stand-by ] FE During a voice call/video-phone call ] FE 36 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Using the UIM (FOMA Card) Your phone number and contracted contents for the service, etc. are recorded in the UIM. You need to insert it into the FOMA phone to make/receive calls or perform communication. Refer to the UIM manual for details of how to use it. Inserting/Removing UIM (FOMA Card) Insert/remove the UIM after you turn off the power of the FOMA phone and remove the rear cover and battery pack beforehand (P39). Remove the AC adapter and options beforehand. Confirming before use Inserting 1. Insert the UIM with its IC-side facing downwards in the direction of the arrow underneath the guide. Removing 1. Slide the UIM in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 37 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Confirming before use
gpOmF Information When inserting / removing the UIM, close the flip, and then put it on your hand. Take care not to accidentally torch or scratch the IC. About Password of UIM You can set 2 passwords, PIN1 and PIN2, for a UIM.
> P105 UIM Restriction Functions The UIM has a restriction function to protect your data and files. If you obtain the following types of data and files with a UIM inserted, restrictions are automatically imposed to disable them when the UIM is not inserted or when another UIM is inserted. Images/melodies/i-motion/i-appli obtained from sites and Internet web pages Files attached to i-mode mail messages and MessagesR/F 38 Differences of UIM There are 2 types of UIM, the green, white and blue UIM and the blue UIM. There are differences in specifications of the following functions between those UIMs:
Function UIM
(Green) UIM (Blue) Number of digits of the phone number that can be stored in the UIM phonebook Up to 26 digits Up to 20 digits WORLD WING Service dialing Available Available Not available Not available a About WORLD WING WORLD WING is DoCoMos international roaming service that allows you to use the same mobile pone number for making and receiving calls after inserting your UIM (Green) in a FOMA phone applicable to the service or mobile phone available for overseas use
(WCDMA or GSM). WORLD WING is available without subscription. If you subscribed to FOMA services before August 31, 2005 and have not subscribed to WORLD WING, a separate subscription is required for WORLD WING. Some billing plans may not be applied to WORLD WING. C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e If the UIM (Green) is lost or stolen overseas, contact DoCoMo immediately to suspend the service. For a contact, see General Inquiries on the back cover of this manual. Please be aware that call and transmission charges made after loss or theft will be charged to you. Attaching/Removing the Battery Pack Make sure that you attach the dedicated battery pack L02 for FOMA L602i to use it. Attaching 1. Press the rear cover in the direction of the arrow 1 to slide it in the direction of the arrow 2, then lift it up in the direction of the arrow 3 to remove. Confirming before use 2. Insert the battery in the direction of the arrow 1 with the label facing downwards, then push it in the direction of the arrow 2. 3. Adjust the rear cover to the ditch of the FOMA phone holding the cover approx. 3mm off, then press it in the direction of the arrow 1 to slide it in the direction of the arrow 2, then push it until it clicks. Next Page 39 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Confirming before use
gpOmF Removing 1. Press the rear cover in the direction of the arrow 1 to slide it in the direction of the arrow 2, then lift it up in the direction of the arrow 3 to remove. 2. Take the projection of the battery pack to lift it up in the direction of the arrow. Information Attach/remove the battery pack with the FOMA phone closed and held in your hand after you turn off the power. In addition, If you attach/remove the battery pack forcibly, it may damage the charging connector of battery. Take care not to attach/remove the rear cover. Note that if the rear cover is forcibly depressed, the slot of the rear cover may be damaged. For details about the battery, see the manual for Battery Pack L02. Charging the FOMA Phone Charging Connect specified AC Adapter (option) to charge the battery after attaching the battery pack to the FOMA phone (P39). You need FOMA AC Adapter 01 for both overseas and domestic usage (option) separately when using the FOMA phone overseas. 1. Open the cover of the external connector terminal of the FOMA phone.
: You can rotate it forward or backward when it is open. 40 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e 2. While pressing the release buttons on both sides of the connector of the AC adapter, connect it horizontally to the FOMA phone with the arrows-
engraved side facing upwards in the direction of the arrow. 3. Insert the AC adapters plug into a power socket. AC100V Confirming before use If you start to charge the battery, the charging start tone will sound. The battery level icon (
) flashes on and off in turn and it is red. After charging, the alarm tone for ending the charging will ring and then the flashing disappears and the LED turns off. If you charge the FOMA phone with the power off, the animation for the battery level is displayed as follows, depending on the battery level.
- In case the battery level is low: Please wait >
Charging > Battery charged
- In case the battery is empty: Please wait > Low battery Please wait > Charging > Battery charged Information When you use the FOMA phone for the first time, the battery pack is not fully charged. Fully charge the battery before using it. When you attach the AC adapter to the FOMA phone, do not use unnecessary force. The FOMA phone and the connector may be damaged. Do not remove the battery pack and the UIM during charging. If the battery cannot be charged correctly, turn off the power once, remove the battery pack, and then reattach it to charge the battery again. If the battery level becomes very low during a video-phone call, connecting the AC adapter may not charge the battery fully, and the power may go off. When charging the battery pack overseas, confirm the voltage used in the country or the area of stay, and use FOMA Overseas/Domestic AC Adapter 01 (option) (A conversion plug Next Page 41 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Confirming before use
gpOmF adapter for overseas travel applying to the country or area of stay is required). Also, do not charge the battery pack using an electric transformer for overseas travel. Refer to the instruction manuals for FOMA AC Adapter 01
(option) and FOMA AC Adapter 01 for both overseas and domestic usage (option) for details. Removing the AC Adapter After charging completes, disconnect the AC adapter from the FOMA phone. 1. Disconnect the connector of the AC adapter from the power socket. 2. While pressing the release buttons on both sides of the connector, remove it horizontally from the FOMA phone in the direction of the arrow. Do not pull the connector forcibly. Malfunction may result. 3. Close the cover of the external connector terminal of the FOMA phone. Checking the Battery Level When turning the power on, the battery level (estimate) icon is appeared. The Battery Level display indicates just an estimate of the battery level.
: Almost full
: Getting low
: Almost empty. Charge the battery immediately. When You Need to Charge the Battery If the battery is completely flat, a message appears, flickers, and the battery alarm sounds. If you press C, the message disappears and the battery alarm stops. Information If you set Manner mode or Original manner mode and set battery alarm to OFF, the alert tone does not ring. 42 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Precautions on the Battery Pack Be sure to use the battery pack dedicated to the FOMA phone. a Battery life Batteries are consumables. The usage time of all chargeable batteries shortens slightly each time they are charged. The batterys life is considered to be exhausted when the usage time of the battery after charging is about half the time it was at purchase.
(The life of the battery is about 1 year. However, it may be shorter if used very frequently.) For environmental protection, bring the exhausted battery to an NTT DoCoMo, dealer, or recycle shop. a Do not charge for long periods of time (several days) with the FOMA phone turned on. Do not leave the FOMA phone power on for long periods of time while charging. Otherwise, when charging finishes, the FOMA phone will attempt to receive power from the battery so that when you actually use the FOMA phone, you will be able to do so for just a short amount of time before the battery alarm sounds. If this happens, charge the battery correctly. When charging the battery again, first disconnect the FOMA phone from the AC adapter and then set it again. Confirming before use a Estimated usage time for battery The usable time of the battery varies depending on the usage environment or its remaining life. Network Stand-by time Continuous talk time FOMA / 3G Static : about 380 hrs Dynamic : about 250 hrs Voice call : about 140 min Video call : about 90 min GSM/GPRS Static : about 260 hrs Voice call: about 200 minutes Continuous talk time is the estimated time when radio waves can be sent and received normally. Continuous stand-by time is the estimated time you can use the FOMA phone in motion when it is closed and can receive radio waves normally. The standby time could be about half of this estimate depending on the battery level, function settings, other ambient conditions such as temperature, the status of radio waves in the area (weak or no radio waves, for instance) and the status of the network of the country in which you stay. The continuous standby time will be shorter if you don't insert the UIM. When you use i-mode communications, the talk/transmission time and standby time will be shorter. Further, even if you do not make calls or perform i-mode communication, the talk/communication time and standby time will be shorter if you compose i-mode mail, start up a downloaded i-appli. 43 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Confirming before use
gpOmF The continuous standby time for standstill is the average number of hours you can use the FOMA phone in standstill status when it is closed and can receive radio waves normally. The continuous standby time for in motion is the average number of hours you can use the FOMA phone in the combined status of standstill, moving and out of the service area when it is closed, in an area where it can receive radio waves normally. The talk/communication time and standby time will also be shorter than the above-mentioned estimates when you perform data transmission or multi-access or when you use the camera. a Estimated time for charging battery FOMA AC Adapter 01 Approx. 180 minutes The estimated charging time is for when the FOMA phone is off and the battery is being charged from empty. The charging time will be longer if you charge the battery with the power turned on. a Other precautions Do not use any other adapter than the specified one. It may shorten the life of the battery pack. Turning Power ON Before you turn on the power, make sure that the UIM is inserted and that the battery is fully charged. 1. Press P for 2 or more seconds After the Wake-up display is displayed, the Stand-by display appears. Information If PIN code request (P100) is set to ON, you need to enter the PIN1 code. If All lock (P99) is set to Power on, you need to enter the terminal security code. Turning Power OFF 1. Press P for 2 or more seconds The Exit display appears and the power is turned off. Information The time to turn off the FOMA phone may be long. Depending on the status of network, the lead time may differ. During switching off the power, do not repeat to power on/off. 44 C o n f i r i m n g b e f o r e u s e Date/Time You can set the date and time and daylight saving time. See Setting Date & Time (P95) for details of how to set them up. Using Caller ID Notification Service The Caller ID Notification Service enables you to notify the other party of your phone number when you make a call. See Using Caller ID Notification Service (P202) for details of how to set it up. Own Number You can display your phone number recorded in the UIM. 1. On the Stand-by display, C ] 0 See Displaying Own Number (P72) for details of how to change the settings on the Own Number display. Confirming before use 45 Making calls/
Receiving calls Making calls............................................48 Receiving calls .......................................51 Using Public mode (drive mode) ...........52 Using Public mode (power off) ..............54 47 i M a k n g c a l l i s
R e c e v n g c a i l l s Making calls/Receiving calls Making calls 1. Enter the other partys phone number Menu Save Search
<Enter Phone Number>
Q : The last digit is cleared. To clear all digits, press it for 1 or more seconds. C [Save]: You can register / add the entered phone number to phonebook. Go to step 2 on page 64 of Adding to Phonebook. I [Search]: You can search for the phone number in phonebook. See the contents after step 3 on page 66. 2. A ] Start talking when the other party answers The other party's name 1 The other party's phone number Call duration The other party's picture 2
1 :
In case of the other party you don't register the information in phonebook, Unregistered will be displayed when receiving or making a call.
2 : The picture will be displayed when you register the picture in phonebook.
<Talking>
48 Press Q for 1 or more seconds: You can switch ON/OFF the speaker phone. 3. P to end the call after talking. Information If you press A after entering the number from 0 to 9 in the Enter Phone Number screen, you can make a call directly matching the the number saved in memory. You can enter a phone number of up to 42 digits. If you enter a phone number exceeding 16 digits, dialing will be made displaying the first 16 digits digits of the phone number. You can make a call after entering 184 (Not notify) or 186
(Notify) in front of phone number. When the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch
(option) is attached, you can only talk on the Earphone /
Microphone regardless that the speaker phone is ON/OFF. When the call is disconnected, the alert sound sounds from a receiver. When dialing/receiving overseas, some name of the other party may not be displayed even that name is registered in the phonebook. Using the Submenus of the Enter Phone Number Display 1. From the Enter Phone Number screen (See left), M[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Notify caller ID Set whether to notify your phone number per call. Not notify : #31# is added in front of the phone number entered, but the phone number is not notified. Notify : 31# is added in front of the phone number entered, and the phone number is notified. Cancel : The added #31# or 31# is deleted. Select prefix The number saved in Setting Prefix Dial (P92) is added before the phone number is entered. International call The international access code saved in International dial setting (P92) is added before the phone number is entered. Save You can save the entered phone number entered into the Phonebook. Go to step 2 on page 64 of Adding to Phonebook. Search phonebook You can search for the phone number in phonebook. For operations after searching, see 3 on page 66 of Searching for Phonebook Entries. Using the Submenus of the Talking screen 1. From the Talking screen (P48), M[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items New call 1 You can put the current call on make and hold a call to another party. End active call You can disconnect the call. Making calls/Receiving calls Hold 1/Cancel held call 1 You can put/release the call on hold. Mute 2/Unmute 2 You can mute/unmute the voice transmitted to the other party. 1: Available only for Call Waiting Service subscribers. To use this service, go to Using Call Waiting Service (P200). 2: Not displayed during call is held. Making a Call From the Dialed/Received Call Record 1. From the Stand-by display, L/R/A/T ]
Select a record ]A Information See Using the Submenu of the Received Calls display (P86) for submenus. Making a Call from the Phonebook 1. U in the Stand-by display, or search the phonebook ] Select the party you want to call ]
A When multiple phone numbers are registered, press A to display the Select call number screen, then select the phone number and press C [Call]. Information To switch the phonebook list to display between the FOMA phone and UIM, select M [Menu] > View handset/View UIM on the phonebook list screen. Next page 49 i M a k n g c a l l i s
R e c e v n g c a i l l s i M a k n g c a l l i s
R e c e v n g c a i l l s Making calls/Receiving calls Using Pause Dial You can use services such as sending messages to a pocket bell, reserving tickets or checking the balance of your bank account by sending push signal from the FOMA handset. 1. Enter the phone number 2. Enter the dial data Press * 3 times to enter pause P Only 0 to 9, #, * and pause P can be entered. Up to 42 digit can be entered. If you enter pause P before the phone number, you can not dial. 3. A A call is made to the other party, and the dial data from the beginning to the first pause P is displayed while being connected. 4. Confirm that the other party accepted > A or C [Select]
The dial data from the beginning to the first P is sent, and the dial data to the next pause P is displayed. Each time you press A or C, the dial data to the next P is sent. When you send the last number, the calling screen appears. Information The other party may not be able to receive the signal depending on the type of the receiver's handset. When using video-phone call, you can not use pause dial. International Calls You can make an international call easily using the DoCoMo international call service WORLD CALL. When you have signed up for FOMA service, you have contracted to use WORLD CALL (except those who have applied not to use it). You can make calls to 240 countries and areas worldwide. a How to make calls 009130 > 010 > Country code > Area code >
Destination phone number > A This service is not available with some billing plans. Application/monthly fee for WORLD CALL is free of charge. The WORLD CALL charges are added to your monthly FOMA bill. Contact DoCoMo Information Center on the back of this manual for inquiries about WORLD CALL. If the other party uses a specific 3G mobile phone overseas, you can make an International Video-phone Call by dialing out using T after following the dialing method described above. 50 The name of DoCoMo's pocket bell has been changed to Quick Cast since January, 2001. See the International Service web page of DoCoMo for Information Making calls/Receiving calls the information about connectable countries and telecommunications carriers. Images sent from the other party may blur on your FOMA phone or you may not be able to connect, depending on the other partys phone used for the international video-phone. When the area code begins with 0, leave this out when dialing. However, include 0 when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy. Making an International Call Easily Confirm that the Setting Prefix Dial (P92) is set to AUTO and 009130010 (WORLD CALL) is set for IDD prefix code in IDD prefix setting. 1. On the Stand-by display, press 0 for 1 or more seconds to enter +
2. Enter Country code > Area code > Destination phone number ]A(T) 3. Yes Confirmation with the test machine required. 4. Pto end the call after talking Adjusting the Volume 1. Press FE Hduring a call or press H for 1 or more seconds. The changed volume is held even after ending the call. Receiving calls 1. When you receive a call, A The other party's image 1 The other party's name 2 The other party's phone number
1 : Displayed only when the other party's image is registered in the phonebook. In case the other party's information is not registered in the phonebook, Unregistered will be displayed.
2 :
<Ringing screen>
I[Silent]: You can set to no sound for incoming call. If you subsequently press I [Reject], incoming call will be rejected. P: You can reject the incoming call. If you close the handset while a call is incoming, the call will be rejected. 2. P to end the call after talking Information When dialing/receiving overseas, some name of the other party may not be displayed even that name is registered in the phonebook. Next Page 51 i M a k n g c a l l i s
R e c e v n g c a i l l s i M a k n g c a l l i s
R e c e v n g c a i l l s Making calls/Receiving calls When you didn't get a call When you could not answer the incoming voice call/video-
phone call, the following screen indicating a missed call appears and the LED blinks for approx. 60 seconds. 1: If you use voice mail menu, you should register this service in operator. For details, see Using voice mail (P198). 2: If you use call forwarding menu, you should register this service in operator. For details, please refer to the Using Call Forwarding Service (P201). Using Public mode (drive mode) Public mode is an auto-answer service that puts stress on manners in public spaces. When there is an incoming call in Public mode, a guidance to the effect that you cannot answer the call because you are driving a car or in a place
(train, bus, theater, etc.) that requires restraint from using a phone is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. Public mode can be set/cancelled only from the stand-by display (in addition, from a screen showing
). You can make calls in Public mode. When there is an incoming call with Deactivate caller ID notification set while caller ID request service is Activate, a caller ID request guidance is played (no Public mode guidance is played). Setting the Public Mode (drive mode) 1. On the stand-by display ] Press * for 1 or more seconds. The Public mode is set and is appeared. The name not registered in phonebook is not displayed. C [OK] : You can view the list of received calls. I [Close] : You can close the screen for missed calls. Using the Submenu of the Ringing Display 1. From the Ringing screen (P51), M[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Voice mail 1 The Call is connected to the Voice Mail Service Center. Call rejection The call is disconnected without answering it. Call forwarding 2 The call is forwarded to the registered phone number. 52 a Releasing the Public Mode On the stand-by display, press * for 1 or more is seconds. The Public mode is released, and disappeared. In Public mode No ring alert sounds when there is an incoming voice/video-
phone call. It is recorded as Missed calls in Received calls and displayed as X Missed call on the stand-by display. A guidance to the effect that you cannot answer the call because you are driving a car or in a place that requires restraint from using a phone is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. Operations while Network Service and Public mode
(drive mode) are both active While Public mode (drive mode) and Network Service are both active at the same time, the FOMA phone operations as listed below. Depending on the settings and/or steps for making a call, Network Service may have precedence, disabling Public mode (drive mode) operations or recording or display of missed calls. a Voice Mail When a voice call is received When a video-phone call is received A Public mode (drive mode) guidance is played for the caller and the call is connected to Voice Mail Service Center. 1 The call is terminated without being connected to the Voice Mail Service Center. 2 Making calls/Receiving calls a Call Waiting When a voice call is received When a video-phone call is received A Public mode (drive mode) guidance is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. In Public mode (drive mode), a Public mode (drive mode) video guidance is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. a Call Forwarding Service When a voice call is received When a video-phone call is received The call is connected to the forwarding destination, with no Public mode (drive mode) video guidance played for the caller. A Public mode (drive mode) guidance is played for the caller and the call is connected to the forwarding destination. Whether the guidance is played to the other party or not depends on the setting of the Call Forwarding Service. 53 i M a k n g c a l l i s
R e c e v n g c a i l l s i M a k n g c a l l i s
R e c e v n g c a i l l s Making calls/Receiving calls a Nuisance Call Blocking Service When a voice call is received When a video-phone call is received For a call from a caller registered for nuisance call blocking, a call rejection guidance is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. For a call from a caller registered for nuisance call blocking, a call rejection video guidance is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. For a call from a caller not For a call from a caller not registered, a Public mode (drive mode) guidance is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. registered, a Public mode (drive mode) guidance is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. a Caller ID Request Service When a voice call is received When a video-phone call is received For a call with no caller ID notified, a caller ID request guidance is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. For a call with caller ID notified, a Public mode (drive mode) guidance is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. For a call with no caller ID notified, a caller ID request video guidance is played for the caller and the call is disconnected. For a call with caller ID notified, a Public mode (drive mode) video guidance is played for the caller and the call is disconnected.
: When voice mail or call forwarding ring time is 0 sec, no Public mode (drive mode) guidance is played and the call is not recorded in Received calls. 54 This handset is not applicable to Voice Mail (Video-phone call). Make a voice call to 1412 (free) and set not to be applicable to video-phone call. Information In Public mode, the following sounds are not generated:
Ring alert for incoming voice/video-phone calls Ring alert for incoming mail Ring alert for incoming MessageR/F Wake-up alarm sound (the icon blinks) Schedule alarm sound (the icon blinks) Battery exhaustion alarm sound The sound of the i-appli started by the setting of auto-start. Battery charging confirmation sound The alarm sounds after releasing the public mode (drive mode). Using Public mode (power off) Public mode is an auto-answer service that lays stress on manners in public spaces. Once you activate Public mode
(power off), the guidance is played back telling that you cannot take the call as you are currently in a place
(in hospital, airplane, or in around priority seat in a train) where use is prohibited. Then the call is disconnected. Activate Public mode (power off) 1. *25251 ]A Public mode (power off) is set. (Nothing is changed in the Stand-by display.) After setting Public mode (power off) and turning off the power, the guidance The person you are calling is currently in an area where use is prohibited. Please try again later. is played back for incoming calls. a To release Public mode (power off)
*25250 ] A a To check Public mode (power off) for the setting,
*25259 ] A When Public mode (power off) is activated When there is an incoming voice call, the guidance is played back to the caller telling that you are currently in an area where use is prohibited, and then the call is disconnected. When there is an incoming video-phone call, the video-guidance of the public mode is played back to the caller, and then the call is disconnected. This setting is continued until you release the setting by dialing 25250. If you just switch on, this setting is not released. The Public mode (power off) guidance is played back even when you are out of the service area or radio waves do not reach. Making calls/Receiving calls Activating between network services and Public mode (power off) If you use Public mode (power off) and Network service at the same time, the operation will be activated as follow. Depending on the setting or calling, the network service can be preferred, so the activation of Public mode (power off) or the record of missed call may not be displayed. a Voice Mail Response to Incoming Voice calls Response to Incoming Video-phone calls Plays back the Public mode
(power off) guidance to caller, and then the call is connected to the Voice mail Service Center. 1 The call is terminated without being connected to the Voice Mail Service Center. 2 a Call Forwarding Service Response to Incoming Voice calls Response to Incoming Video-phone calls Plays back the Public mode
(power off) guidance to caller, and then the call is forwarded to the forwarding destination. 1 The guidance depends on setting of Call Forwarding Service. Does not play back the video guidance for Public mode, and the call is forwarded to the forwarding destination. If the destination does not support video-phone call, the call is disconnected. 55 i M a k n g c a l l i s
R e c e v n g c a i l l s i M a k n g c a l l i s
R e c e v n g c a i l l s Making calls/Receiving calls a Nuisance Call Blocking Service Response to Incoming Voice calls Response to Incoming Video-phone calls When the caller is registered to When the caller is registered to the Nuisance Call Blocking Service, the guidance of the call rejection is played to the caller and the call is terminated. In other cases, the guidance of the public mode (power off) is played to the caller and the call is terminated. the Nuisance Call Blocking Service, the image guidance of the call rejection is played to the caller and the call is terminated. In other cases, the guidance of the public mode (power off) is played to the caller and the call is terminated. a Caller ID Display Request Response to Incoming Voice calls Response to Incoming Video-phone calls For the caller without a caller ID, plays back the Caller ID Request guidance, and then the call is disconnected. For the caller with a caller ID, plays back the Public mode
(power off) guidance, and then the call is disconnected. For the caller without a caller ID, plays back the video guidance for Caller ID Request, and then the call is disconnected. For the caller with a caller ID, plays back the video guidance for Public mode (power off), and then the call is disconnected. 1: When voice mail or call forwarding ring time is set to 0 sec, no Public mode (power off) guidance is played. 2: This handset is not applicable to Voice Mail (Video-phone call). Make a voice call to 1412 (free) and set not to be applicable to video-phone call. 56 Making/Receiving Video-phone calls About Video-phone ................................58 Making Video-phone Calls.....................58 Receiving Video-phone Calls.................60 Changing Settings for Video-phone Calls..................................61 57 i i i M a k n g
R e c e v n g V d e o
p h o n e c a i l l s Making/Receiving Video-phone calls About Video-phone When both you and the other party use DoCoMo's video-
phones, you can talk seeing each other's image. DoCoMo video-phones conform to 3G 324M 2 standardized by the international standard 3GPP 1 . You cannot connect to the video-phone that uses a different format. 1 : 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) is the regional standards organization for developing common technical specifications for third-generation mobile telecommunications systems (IMT2000). 2 : 3G324M is the international standard for the third generation of mobile video-phones. The video-phone call is activated at the speed of 64K bytes. Making Video-phone Calls 1. Enter the other partys phone number The Enter Phone Number screen (P48) is displayed. 2. T ] Start talking when the other party answers The other party's image The volume during a call Call duration Own image Image Menu Hold
<Talking Display>
58 Mark
Description Speaker phone ON/OFF Zooming magnification The voice of the other party is heard from the speaker when the call starts. Press Q for 1 or more second: You can switch ON/OFF the speaker phone. C[Image]/[Camera]: You can switch between Substitutive image and your photo image for sending to the other party. I[Hold]/[Active]: You can put the call on hold or release hold. While the call is put on hold, a substitutive image is sent to the other party. T: Rotate an image. 3. Press P to end the call after talking Information See International Calls (P50) for how to make international calls. When the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch (option) is attached, you can only talk on the Earphone/ Microphone regardless of whether the speaker phone is ON/OFF. Using the Submenu of the Enter Phone Number screen See Using the Submenus of the Enter Phone Number screen (P48) of voice calls for the submenus available. Using the Submenus of the Talking screen Setting item/Setting at purchase > P253 1. From the Talking screen (P58), M [Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items End call The call is disconnected. Hold You can put the call on hold. You can cancel the function by pressing I [Active]. Substitutive image/Camera image You can switch to the Substitutive image for sending to the other party. > P94 Camera settings You can set the camera of Video-phone call. You can select the icon by pressing J. After setting, press I
[Close]. Zoom : The camera image is zoomed. (x1/x2) Brightness : You can change the brightness of photo images. Night mode : You can set it up when using the camera in a dark place. Video-phone settings You can set the display of Video-phone call. After setting, press I [Done]. > P93 Making/Receiving Video-phone calls Display setting : You can set the display method for the Talking screen. Both : The other partys image and your image are displayed. Other : Only the other partys image is displayed. Me : Only your image is displayed. Sub screen : If you select Both of video-phone settings, you can set the image which displayed each screen. Me : Only your image is displayed. Other : Only the other party's image is displayed. Display light: You can set the lighting method of the backlight on the Talking screen. Always on : Always lights during a call. Terminal setting : Follows the settings on the Main screen of the Backlight. > P83 Sending image quality You can set the quality of images to be sent to the other party. Normal : Sends images in standard quality and motion speed. Prefer motion quality : Sends images laying stress on motion speed. Prefer motion quality is effective for moving images. Prefer image quality : Sends images laying stress on image quality. Prefer image quality is effective if there is little motion. 59 i i i M a k n g
R e c e v n g V d e o
p h o n e c a i l l s i i i M a k n g
R e c e v n g V d e o
p h o n e c a i l l s Making/Receiving Video-phone calls Making a Video-phone call from the Dialed/Received Call Record 1. On the Stand-by display, L/R/A/T ] Select a history ] T Information See Using the Submenu of the Received Call Record Screen
(P86) for the submenu. Making a Video-phone Call from the Phonebook 1. On the Stand-by display U, or Search for phonebook entries (P66) ] Select a party to call ]
T When multiple phone numbers are registered, press T to display the Select call number screen, then select the phone number and press C [Call]. Information To switch the phonebook to display between the FOMA phone and UIM, select M [Menu] > Select View handset /
View UIM. Adjusting the Volume 1. Press H/FE during a call. 60 Information The changed volume is held even after ending the call. Receiving Video-phone Calls 1. When you receive a call, T/A The other party's image 1 The other party's name 2 The other party's phone number
1 : Displayed only when the other party's image is registered in the phonebook. In case the other party's information is not registered in the phonebook, Unregistered will be displayed.
2 :
<Ringing Display>
C[Image]: You can receive a call. The substitutive image will be sent to the other party. P: You can put the call on hold. The holding image will be sent to the other party. If you press C, you can answer the call. T: Rotate an image. If you close the handset while a call is incoming, the call will be rejected. 2. P to end the call after talking Making/Receiving Video-phone calls Information When inserting the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone set with Switch (option), you can connect a call by earphone regardless of Speakerphone ON/OFF. If you answer a video-phone call by pressing the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone set with Switch (option) when closing the flip, the substitutive image will be sent. Using the Submenus of the Ringing screen See Using the Submenus of the Ringing screen (P51) of voice calls for the submenus available. Note that Voice mail is not displayed for video-phone calls. Changing Settings for Video-phone Calls C]
(Settings) ] 3 You can set the operation and display for video-phone calls. See Setting Operation and Display for video-phone Calls (P93) and Selecting an Image for video-phone Calls (P94) for details of the settings. 61 i i i M a k n g
R e c e v n g V d e o
p h o n e c a i l l s Adding to Phonebook ............................64 Searching for Phonebook Entries..........66 Checking the Number of Saved Phonebook Entries.................................70 Setting Phonebook.................................70 Setting Groups .......................................71 Displaying Own Number ........................72 Phonebook Phonebook Phonebook 1 Add to phonebook 2 Seach phonebook 3 No. of phonebook 4 Phonebook settings 5 Group settings 6 Own number Select Select To display the Phonebook menu On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(Phonebook) or Phonebook 63 Phonebook Adding to Phonebook C]
(Phonebook) ]1 2 types of phonebooks are available, the phonebook saved in the handset of the FOMA phone and the phonebook saved in UIM. 1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), Add to phonebook Add to phonebook Handset Name Reading Number1 Mail addr1 No group Select Save P h o n e b o o k
<Saving Phonebook Entries>
2. Select an item to save Handset /
FOMA card (UIM) Select a storage location of the Phonebook (Handset
/ UIM). Name Enter a name. Unless you enter a name, the Phonebook entry cannot be saved. Reading Enter reading of the name. Automatically inserted if you enter Name. 64 Number 1 ~ 5 1 Enter a phone number. If you press M [Icon] after entering, you can set a mark other than
. Mail addr 1 3 1 Enter a mail address. If you press M [Icon] after entering, you can set a mark other than
. Group (Handset)/
Group FOMA card (UIM) Select a group to save. Image 2 Select an image to be displayed on dialing / receiving calls screen, talking screen, phonebook list screen and phonebook detail screen. No image : No image is set. Character: You can set the character. Select the part (Face, Hair, Tops, Bottoms, Acc., Scenery) by pressing H, and then select the item by pressing J. After setting, press C. Select picture : You can select from images saved in My picture of Data box. > P166 Take picture: You can start a camera. Go to step 2 on page 109 of Shooting Still Images. The size of image 80x96 cannot be changed. Set ringtone 2 You can set a ring tone for when you receive a voice /
video-phone call from registered caller. Data box : You can select from melodies saved in Melody of Data box. >P176 Terminal setting : Go to the settings of Select ring 3 : For secret code, refer to Mobile Phone User's Guide Phonebook tone. > P76 Set mail ringtone 2 You can set a ring tone for when you receive mail from registered party. Data box: You can select from melodies saved in Melody of Data box. > P176 Terminal setting: Follows the settings of ringtone. > P76 URL 2 You can enter a URL. Postal code 2 You can enter a postal code. Home addr. 2 You can enter a home address. Company name 2 You can enter a company name. Job title 2 You can enter a job title. Company addr. 2 You can enter a company address. Memo 2 You can enter a memo. Secret Code 3 Set to the secret code. 1 : Only 1 entry can be saved if the storage location for the Phonebook is set to FOMA card (UIM). 2 : Not displayed if the storage location for the Phonebook is set to FOMA card (UIM). P h o n e b o o k
[i-mode]. 3. After storing, I[Save] ] Enter a memory number
(0-499) ] C Saving in UIM 1. From the Saving Phonebook Entries screen (P64), select the
(Handset) field ]Select 2. Enter required items using J See (P64) of Adding to Phonebook for details of the items. 3. I[Save]
Information For phone numbers of the Phonebook saved in Memory No 0 9 (1 saved in Number1), if you press 0~9 and then press A (T) from the Stand-by display, you can make a voice (video-phone) call. 500 Phonebook entries can be saved in the FOMA phone and 50 Phonebook entries can be saved in the UIM. Note that the number of savable entries may be smaller depending on the saved contents. > P70 65 Phonebook Searching for Phonebook Entries C]
(Phonebook) ]2 You can display the Phonebook in the FOMA phone / UIM specifying a search method. 1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), Search phonebook I[UIM]/[Handset]: You can switch Phonebook Search screens between the FOMA phone and the UIM. 2. Select the following search method P h o n e b o o k Phone No. search You can search by entering part of the phone number. Domain search You can search by specifying a domain. You can switch domains using J. To create a domain to specify, see Creating a domain list (P70).
: Not selectable on the Phonebook Search display of UIM. 3. The Phonebook List meeting the search method is displayed. Show all data Press the buttons 1~0 corresponding to the 50 Japanese syllables (corresponding to Columns) for searching. If you press *, you can search for Other item. You can switch tab of the 50 syllabary by pressing J. Group search You can specify a group for searching. (Group 1~30
(FOMA Handset) / 1~10 (UIM)). After searching, you can switch groups by pressing J. Reading search You can search by entering some of the characters contained in the reading of the name. Memory No. search You can search by using a memory number (0-499). You can switch tab of the memory number by pressing J. 66
<Phonebook List>
A/T : You can make a voice call or video-phone call to the selected phone number saved in phonebook. However, when multiple phone numbers are registered, press A/T to display the Select call number screen, then select the phone number and press C [Call]. I[Mail] : You can compose i-mode mail to selected C[Connect] : You can connect the web page of Phonebook mail address or phone number registered in the selected phonebook. Go to step 3 on page 149 of Composing i-mode mail. When multiple mail addresses or phone numbers are registered in the phonebook, press I [Mail] to display the destination selection screen, then select the destination.
: If the mail address or phone number is not registered in the phonebook, you cannot use this function. 4. Select the desired Phonebook ] C
<Detailed Phonebook>
A/T : You can make a voice call or video-phone call to the phone number saved in phonebook. When multiple phone numbers are registered, the Select call number screen is displayed, and select the phone number and press C [Call]. C[Call] : You can make a call to selected phone number. C[Mail] : You can compose an i-mode mail to selected mail address saved in phonebook. Go to step 3 on page 149 of Composing i-mode mail. P h o n e b o o k selected URL. Using the Submenus of the Phone List display Setting item/Setting at purchase > P253 1.From the Phonebook List screen (P60), M[Menu] ]
Select from the following submenu items View UIM 4/FOMA phone phonebook display 5 Switch between UIM phonebook and FOMA phone phonebook displays. Search ctgry menu 1 Handset 4/UIM 5 Group settings : After Group search, you can set the each displayed group in the phonebook list screen. Go to step 2 on page 71 of Using the Submenus of the Group Settings screen. Input char chg: You can switch entry modes for the Character Entry column displayed at the top of the phonebook list screen after Reading search. Return to input: You can return without Input character change. Create domain list: You can create a new domain list from the Phone List display after Domain search. Go to step 2 on page 70 of Creating a Domain List. Next Page 67 Phonebook Mail/URL 2 Compose mail: The mail address or phone number saved in the selected Phonebook is entered into the destination. Go to step 3 on page 149 of Composing i-mode mail message. Compose SMS: The phone number saved in the selected Phonebook is entered into the destination. Go to step 3 on page 152 of Creating SMS. Connect to URL: Connected to the web page with the URL saved in the selected Phonebook. Add new You can create a new phonebook. Go to step 2 on page 64 of Adding to Phonebook for items to be saved. Edit You can edit the selected Phonebook. Go to step 2 on Page 64 of Adding to Phonebook for items to be saved. Send Ir data 3 For Infrared Communication, see Using the Infrared Communication (P182). Focused data: Send a selected phonebook entry via infrared communication. All data: Send all phonebook entries via infrared communication. Search by You can select another search method to display a phonebook. For the searching method, Go to step 2 on page 66 of Searching for Phonebook Entries. P h o n e b o o k 68 Copy Copy to UIM 4: You can copy the Phonebook selected to the UIM. Select copy to UIM 4: You can copy multiple Phonebooks selected to the UIM. If you press M, you can select All data. After selecting, press I[Done]. Copy to handset 5: You can copy the Phonebook selected to the handset of the FOMA phone. Select copy to handset 5: You can copy multiple Phonebooks selected to the handset of the FOMA phone. If you press M, you can select All data. After selecting, press I[Done]. Delete Delete: You can delete the selected Phonebook. Delete selected: You can delete the multiple Phonebooks selected. If you press M, you can select all data. After selecting, press I[Done]. Delete all 6: You can delete all Phonebooks. To delete all Phonebooks, your terminal security code is required. Display image 7 If an image is registered in phonebook list, you can set whether to display the image or not. > P71 Int'l call (Japan) 8 Make a call to a phone number registered in the selected phonebook. > P227 This submenu appears only while International roaming service is active. 1: You can user phonebook list by Group search except for No group, Reading search, Phone No. search and Domain search. You may not be able to select it depending on the search method or storage status of the selected Phonebook. 2: You cannot select it if no phone number/mail address/URL is stored in the selected Phonebook. 3: Not selected in Phonebook for UIM. 4: Displayed on the Phonebook of the handset. 5: Displayed on the Phonebook of the UIM. 6: If you perform Delete all while checking new i-mode mail/SMS or activating i-appli, active functions are terminated and returns to Stand-by screen. 7: No image is displayed on the Phonebook of the UIM. 8: Does not appear within Japan. Using the Submenus of the Detailed Phonebook Display 1. From the Detailed Phonebook screen (P67), M[Menu]
] Select from the following submenu items Mail/URL 1 Compose mail: The mail address or phone number saved in the phonebook displayed is entered into the Address. Go to step 3 (P149) of Composing i-
mode mail message. Compose SMS: The phone number saved in the phonebook displayed is entered into the Address. Go to step 3 (P152) of Composing SMS. Connect to URL: Connected to the homepage of the URL saved in the Phonebook displayed. Phonebook Edit You can edit the phonebook. Go to step 2 on page 64 of Adding to Phonebook. Send Ir data 2 For details, please refer to Using the Infrared Communication Function (P182). Copy to UIM 3 You can copy the phonebook entry to the UIM. Copy to handset 4 You can copy the phonebook entry to the FOMA handset. Delete You can delete the phonebook entry. Int'l call (Japan) 5 Make a call to a phone number registered in the selected phonebook. > P227 1: You cannot select it if no phone number/mail address/URL is stored in the selected Phonebook. 2: Not selected in Phonebook for UIM. 3: Displayed during displaying the Phonebook of the handset of the FOMA phone. 4: Displayed during displaying the Phonebook of the UIM. 5: Does not appear within Japan. P h o n e b o o k 69 Phonebook Checking the Number of Saved Phonebook Entries C]
(Phonebook) ]3 You can check the number of phonebook entries saved in the handset of the FOMA phone and in the UIM as well as the number of phonebook entries available. 1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), No. of phonebook Information Actual savable number of phonebook may be smaller depending on the contents saved in Phonebook. P h o n e b o o k Setting Phonebook Creating a Domain List C]
(Phonebook) ]42 You can store domains to be used when doing Domain Search (P66). Setting item/Setting at purchase > P242 1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), Phonebook settings ] Create domain list I[Disp.] 1: You can view all domain registered in a list. M[Delete] 2: You can delete the domain saved. 1: You cannot use this menu when you select no input screen. 2: You cannot use this menu when you select
@docomo.ne.jp or no input screen. 2. Select the domain list field ]C]Enter a domain
]C Setting Display Data C]
(Phonebook) ]41 Selecting a Search Method You can set whether to display the phonebook of the handset of the FOMA phone or the phonebook of the UIM when displaying a phonebook. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P241, P242 1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), Phonebook settings ] Display data ]Handset only/UIM only C
(Phonebook) 43 You can set the search method for when you press U on the Stand-by display and bring up the phonebook search display. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P242 1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), Phonebook settings ] Search by ] Select a search method Go to step 2 on page 66 of Searching the Phonebook Entries for the search method. 70 Information If the Display data (See left) is set to UIM only, you cannot select Memory No. search. Displaying Images C]
(Phonebook) ]44 You can set whether to display the image set when selecting a phonebook with on the phonebook list screen. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P242 1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), Phonebook
(image setting) set (P64) settings ] Display image ] ON/OFF Setting Groups C]
(Phonebook) ]5 You can save the group name for Group of the phonebook. You can also set a ring tone for each group. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P242 1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), Group settings Group settings display appears. I[UIM]/[Handset]: You can switch the Group settings displays between the FOMA phone (handset) and the UIM. Phonebook 2. Select the group to set ] C ] Select the following item to register ] After setting, press I [Finish]
Group name You can save the name of the group. Ringtone You can set a ring tone for when a call comes in. Data box: You can select from the melodies stored in Melodies of Data box. >P176 Terminal setting: Follows the settings of ringtone. >P76 Mail ringtone You can set a ring tone for when mail comes in. Data box: You can select from the melodies saved in Melody of Data box. >P176 Terminal setting: Follows the settings of Select ringtone. >P76
: Not displayed on the Group setting display of the UIM. P h o n e b o o k Information You cannot set to No group. 71 Phonebook Using the Submenus of the Group Settings Screen 1. From the Group Settings screen, M [Menu]
]Select from the following submenu items Reset 1 You can reset the settings of the group selected. Move 2 You can change the order of the group selected. Edit You can edit the group selected. Go to step 2 (P71) of Setting Groups. Reset all 3 You can reset the settings and orders of all groups. P h o n e b o o k 1: You cannot use this menu when the selected group is not edited. 2: You cannot use this menu in FOMA card group setting screen. 3: You cannot use this menu when not moving or editing any group. 72 Displaying Own Number C]
(Phonebook) ]6 You can display your phone number recorded in the UIM. 1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), Own number The Own number screen appears. Information You can also check your own number by pressingC0 from the Stand-by display. Displaying Details of Own Number 1. From the Own number screen, C[Detail] ] Enter your terminal security code ] C The Detail screen appears. A/T: You can make a voice/ video-phone call by the number registered in. (except own number) When multiple phone numbers are registered, the Select call number screen is displayed, and select the phone number and press C [Call]. C[Call] : You can make a voice call to the selected phone number.
: You cannot use your own number. C[Mail]: You can compose i-mode mail to selected mail address. Go to step 3 on page 149 of Composing i-mode Mail. C[Connect]: You can connect the homepage of selected URL. Using the Submenu of the Detail Screen 1. From the Detail Screen, M[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Mail/URL 1 Compose mail: The mail address registered in my number will be entered to destination. Go to step 3 on page 149 of Composing i-mode Mail. Compose SMS 2: The phone number registered in my number will be entered to destination. Go to step 3 on page 152 of Composing SMS message. Connect to URL: You can connect the homepage of URL registered in my number.
(Own number) cannot be edited. Edit You can store your own information. For adding method, go to step 2 on page 64 of Adding to Phonebook. However, your number registered in Send Ir data 3 You can send your own number through infrared communication. For details related to infrared communication, go to Using the Infrared Communication Function on P182. Reset 4 You can reset the edited own number information to its default. 1: You cannot use this menu if the phone number/mail/URL are not registered. Phonebook 2: You cannot use the menu even if you operate the number registered in own number. 3: You cannot use this menu during a call. 4: You cannot use this menu when the own number information is not registered. P h o n e b o o k 73 Sound/
Sound Display 1 Ring volume 2 Effect tone volume 3 Select ringtone 4 Select effect tone 5 Vibration settings 6 Manner settings 7 Mail ring duration Select Display 1 Main display 2 Sub display 3 Font 4 Menu style 5 Backlight 6 Color scheme 7 Lighting LED Select To display the Sound menu On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(Sound) or Sound To display the Display menu On the Standby display, C[Menu] ]
(Display) or Display 75 Adjusting the Ring Volume ....................76 Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume .........76 Setting a Ring Tone................................76 Setting an Effect Tone ...........................77 Setting a Vibrator ...................................78 Activating the Manner Mode .................78 Setting Ringing Operations for Incoming Mail ........................................79 Setting Ringing Time..............................80 Setting Main Screen...............................80 Setting Sub Display................................82 Setting Fonts of Dial Characters ...........83 Setting Menu Style .................................83 Setting Backlight ....................................83 Setting color Scheme.............................84 Setting LED.............................................84 S o u n d
D s p a y i l Sound/Display Adjusting the Ring Volume Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume C]
(Sound) ]1 C]
(Sound) ]2 Setting items/Setting at purchase > P244 1. From the Sound menu (P75), Ring volume ]
Select from the following adjustment items ]
After setting,I [Done]
Voice call You can adjust the ring tone volume for voice calls. Video-phone You can adjust the ring tone volume for video-phone calls. Mail tone You can adjust the ring tone volume for mail. MessageR tone You can adjust the ring tone volume for MessageR. MessageF tone You can adjust the ring tone volume for MessageF. SMS tone You can adjust the ring tone volume for SMS. Information When you receive mail, messageR/F or SMS on opening the flip, the alarm sound will be fixed to level 1 regardless of each setting of Ring volume. However, if you set level 0 of ring tone, the alarm does not sound. 76 Setting items/Setting at purchase > P244 1. From the Sound menu (P75), Effect tone volume
] Select from the following adjustment items ]
After setting,I [Done]
Key tone You can adjust the key pad sound volume. Power ON/OFF You can adjust the tone volume for when turning the FOMA phone on/off. Flip tone You can adjust the tone volume for when opening or closing the FOMA phone. Feedback tone You can adjust the tone volume for when a popup appears. Setting a Ring Tone C]
(Sound) ]3 You can set the ring tone for voice call, video-phone call or mail. In addition to ring alerts and melodies registered by default, you can set melodies and/or i-motion downloaded from i-mode sites and web pages as incoming ring alerts. You can set the SMF, MFI or MP4 file as a ringtone. For the melody registered at purchase, see List of phonebook (P64) Sound/Display melody (P251). Setting items/Setting at purchase > P245 1. From the Sound menu (P75), Select ringtone ]
Select from the following adjustment items ]
After setting, I[Done]
Select from the melodies stored in Melody or i-motion in Data box respectively. >P176 On a folder list screen, press Q to switch between Melody and i-motion. Voice call You can select a ring tone for voice calls. Video-phone You can select a ring tone for video-phone calls. Mail tone You can select a ring tone for mail. MessageR tone You can select a ring tone for messageR. MessageF tone You can select a ring tone for messageF. SMS tone You can select a ring tone for SMS. Information If you have set a ring tone depending on the voice call/ video phone call/ Mail, the ring tone is preferred. The priority order is as follows:
1 Ringtone set in the FOMA phones phonebook > Set the 2 Ringtone set for a group of the FOMA phones phonebook
> Set group (P71) 3 Ringtone volume/Video call ring tone/Mail, Message ring tone > Select the ring tone (P76) Setting an Effect Tone C]
(Sound) ]4 Setting items/Setting at purchase > P245 1. From the Sound menu (P75), Select effect tone ]
Select from the following adjustment items ] After setting, I[Done]
Key tone You can set to emit an effect tone for when you touch the buttons. The effect tone does not sound when setting to OFF. Power ON/OFF You can set whether to emit an effect tone for when you switch ON/OFF the FOMA phone. Flip tone You can set whether to emit an effect tone for when you open/close the FOMA phone. Feedback tone You can set whether to emit an effect tone for when a popup appears. 77 S o u n d
D s p a y i l S o u n d
D s p a y i l Sound/Display Setting a Vibrator C]
(Sound) ]5 Setting items/Setting at purchase > P245 1. From the Sound menu (P75), Vibration settings ]
Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I[Done]
Incoming call You can select a vibration pattern for when a voice call or a video-phone call comes in. melody+vibration: The vibration and the melody for incoming call are activated at the same time. Pattern 1(Vibration only): This activates the vibration to pattern 1. Regardless of ring tone, the tone for incoming call does not sound. Pattern 2(Vibration only): This activates the vibration to pattern 2. Regardless of ring tone, the tone for incoming call does not sound. OFF: The vibration is not activated in FOMA phone. Message You can set a vibration pattern for when mail, messageR/F or SMS comes in. melody+vibration: The vibration and the melody for incoming call are activated at the same time. Pattern 1(Vibration only): This activates the vibration to pattern 1. Regardless of ring tone, the tone for incoming call does not sound. 78 Pattern 2(Vibration only): This activates the vibration to pattern 2. Regardless of ringtone, the tone for incoming call does not sound. OFF: The vibration is not activated in FOMA phone. Activating the Manner Mode You can set whether to mute the ring tone, key pad sound and any other sound from the speaker to avoid annoying people around you. If the manner mode is activated, an incoming call or alarm, etc. is notified with vibrator. You can change the activation on setting manner mode to Original manner mode. > P79 1. From the Stand-by display, press # for 2 or more seconds The handset of the FOMA phone vibrates displaying
(blue/in the Original manner mode) or the Manner mode).
(pink/in You can cancel it by pressing # for 2 or more seconds with the Manner mode activated. Changing Manner Modes C]
(Sound) ]6 You can change operations in the Manner mode. Setting at purchase > P245, P246 1. From the Sound menu (P75), Manner settings ]
Select from the following setting items Manner mode You can set the Manner mode. Original manner mode You can customize operations in the Manner mode. After setting, press I [Done]. Incoming call sound: You can set whether to make the ring tone sound when a voice call or video-phone call comes in. Incoming call vib.: You can set whether to vibrate the phone when a voice call or video-phone call comes in. Message sound: You can set whether to make the ring tone sound when mail, messageR/F or SMS comes in. Message vibration: You can set whether to vibrate the phone when mail, messageR/F or SMS comes in. Key tone: You can set whether to make the key operation sound when you do key operations. Flip tone: You can set whether to make an effect tone sound when you open or close the FOMA phone. Low battery tone: You can set whether to make a battery alarm tone sound when the battery is flat. Information The following sounds are emitted even when the manner mode is activated. Sound/Display The shutter tone on shooting still and moving image. > P110 The alert tone for disconnecting a call. > P48, P51 The alert tone to reconnect > P91 The alert tone for the quality of calling > P92 If you try to play the melody, moving image or i-motion on manner mode, the confirmation screen appears and you can select whether to play with sounds. Setting Ringing Operations for Incoming Mail C]
(Sound) ]7 You can set whether to make the ring tone sound when mail or SMS comes in. You can also set ringing duration and cycle of rings. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P246 1. From the Sound menu (P75), Mail ring duration ]
Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I[Done]
Mail ring ON/OFF You can set whether to make the ring tone sound when mail comes in. If you select ON, you can set the ringing duration or cycle of ringing. Mail ring duration You can set ringing time and number of rings for the ringing tone. Time: After selecting Sec. section by pressing D, you can enter the duration of ringing. 79 S o u n d
D s p a y i l S o u n d
D s p a y i l Sound/Display Cycle: After selecting Cycle section by pressing D, you can enter the number of cycle. When the image saved in stand-by mode, making and receiving a call at purchase, please refer to Pre-installed data (P260) Setting Ringing Time Setting the Stand-by Display C]
(Sound) ]8 You can specify the mute time in seconds before ringing starts when a voice call or video-phone call which is not registered in phonebook comes in. This function is effective as a countermeasure for nuisance calls such as 1 ring phone scam. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P246 1. From the Sound menu (P75), Select Set mute seconds ] Enter ring time. ] I [Done]
Information If the voice call or video-phone call which are not registered in phonebook disconnects within the setting ringing time, they are not recorded in received call list. Setting Main Screen You can set the display for stand-by display or Incoming/outgoing screen as Main display. You can set the maximum of the image size of 1280 x 1024, the file size of JPEG file to 700K bytes and the file size of GIF file to 500K bytes on the Stand-by display. Depending on the image, some cannot be set properly. 80 C]
(Display) ]11 You can set wallpapers and clock displays for the Stand-
by display. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P246 1. From the Display Menu (P75), Main display ]
Stand-by display ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I [Done]
Wallpaper Select type field 1 Select file ... Select an image saved in My picture of Data box from Select file/Clock theme field. Clock theme ... Select a clock theme from Select file/Clock theme field. Select file/Clock theme field 1: Select an image
(P166) or a clock theme saved in My picture of Data box. The selectable items may differ depending on the settings of Select type field. Sound/Display Display items 2 Select display type field 1 Clock ... Display a digital clock on the stand-by screen. You can select the type of the clock by Select clock/city field. Dual clock ... Display 2 cities and times on the stand-
by screen. You can select the city of the second time displayed lower by Select clock/city field. 3 Calendar + Clock ... Display both calendar and clock on the stand-by screen. You can select the font color of the clock by Clock font color. Do not show ... Do not display the clock on the stand-by screen. Information If you press M [View], you can confirm the display set. Setting the Display for Incoming Calls C]
(Display) ]12 You can set the image displayed when you receive an incoming call. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P246 1. From the Display Menu (P75), Main display ]
Incoming call Select from the images saved on My picture of Data Select clock/city field 1 4: Select the type of the box. > P166 digital clock or a city. The selectable items may differ depending on the settings of Select display type field. Clock font color 5 Set the font color of the clock display. 1: Actually, the name of the selected item is displayed. 2: Not displayed when you select Clock theme by Select type field. 3: You can change the displayed city name also by World time
> P187 4: Not displayed when you select Do not show/Calendar +
Clock by Select display type field. 5: Displayed only when you select Calendar + clock or Digital 4 of Clock by Select display type field. Setting Display for Outgoing Calls C]
(Display) ]13 You can set the image displayed when you make a call. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P246 1. From the Display Menu ] Main display ]
Outgoing call (P75) Select from the images saved on My picture of Data box. > P166 81 S o u n d
D s p a y i l Sound/Display Setting Sub Display You can set images of the stand-by display for Sub display and displays for incoming and outgoing calls. You can set the maximum of the image size of 1280 x 1024, the file size of JPEG file to 700K bytes and the file size of GIF file to 500K bytes on the stand-by display. Some images cannot be set properly. When the image saved in stand-by mode, making and receiving a call at purchase, see Pre-installed data at purchase (P260) S o u n d
D s p a y i l Select file/Clock theme field 1: Select an image
(P166) or a clock theme saved in My picture of Data box. The selectable items may differ depending on the settings of "Select type field". Display items 2 You can set the display format for the clock. 1: Actually, the name of the selected item is displayed. 2: Does not appear when a wallpaper is set as stand-by theme. Information You can view the screen after setting by pressing M [View]. Setting Stand-by Display C]
(Display) ]21 Setting Display for Incoming Calls C]
(Display) ]22 You can set the image to be displayed when you receive a call. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P247 1. From Display Menu (P75), Sub display ]
Incoming call Select from the images saved on My picture of Data box. > P166 You can set wallpapers and clock displays on the Stand-
by display. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P246, P247 1. From the Display Menu (P75), Sub display ]
Stand-by display ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I[Done]
Wallpaper Select type field 1 Select file ... Select an image saved in My picture of Data box from Select file/Clock theme field. Clock theme ... Select a clock theme from Select file/Clock theme field. 82 Setting the Display for Outgoing Calls Setting Menu Style Sound/Display C]
(Display) ]23 You can change the image to be displayed when you make a call. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P247 1. From Display Menu (P75), Sub display ]
Outgoing call Select from the images saved on My picture of Data box. > P166 Setting Fonts of Dial Characters C]
(Display) ]3 You can set the sizes and colors of the dial fonts displayed when you make a call, etc. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P247 1. From the Display Menu (P75), Font ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I[Done]. Dial font size Select a size of dial fonts. Dial font color Select a color of dial fonts. C]
(Display) ]4 You can set the style of the Menu Style that appears when pressing C [Menu] on the Stand-by display. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P247 1. From the Display Menu (P75), Menu style ]
Grid/List ] I[Done]
Setting Backlight C]
(Display) ]5 You can set the lighting duration of the Main screen, Sub display or buttons. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P247 1. From the Display Menu (P75), Backlight ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I[Done]. Main display Set the lighting duration and brightness of the Main screen. Sub display Set the lighting duration and brightness of the Sub display. Keypad Set the lighting duration of the buttons. 83 S o u n d
D s p a y i l S o u n d
D s p a y i l Receiving mail Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming mail. Receiving message R Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming MessageR. Receiving message F Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming MessageF. Receiving SMS Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming SMS. Playing music Set lighting pattern and color used when playing music. Alarm Set lighting pattern and color used for alarm. Schedule Set lighting pattern and color used for scheduled alarm. During call Set lighting pattern and color used during talking over a call. Sound/Display Setting color Scheme C]
(Display) ]6 You can set the color scheme of the Main screen. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P247 1. From the Display Menu (P75), Color scheme ]
Select the color scheme you want to set ] I
[Done]. Information If you press C [View], you can view the screen after setting. Setting LED C]
(Display) ]7 Set lighting for incoming voice calls, etc. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P247, P248 1. From Display menu (P75), Lighting LED ] Select next item to be set ] I[Done]
Lighting Set whether to set lighting. Incoming voice call Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming voice calls. Incoming video call Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming video-
phone calls. 84 Call/Answer ............................................86 Call Feature ............................................91 Video-Phone...........................................93 Date & Time ............................................95 Network (for overseas use) ....................96 Changing a Host from i-mode ...............98 Security...................................................99
.........................................101 Others Settings.....................................101 Settings To display the Settings menu On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(Settings) or Settings 85 Settings Call/Answer Checking Call/Mail History Displaying Received Call Records C]
(Settings) ]111 You can view the record of received call. 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call/Answer ]
Call/Mail history ] Received calls S e t t i n g s This list will be displayed when the phone number in a list are registered in phonebook list. You can view the list by pressing J.
<Received Calls>
Icon Description Received voice calls Received video-phone calls Rejected calls Missed calls (Voice calls) Missed calls (Video-phone calls) 86 A/T: You can make a call to the other party of the record being selected. I[Delete]: You can delete the record being selected. 2. Select a call record ]C When you select Missed call history, Ringing time is displayed.
<Detail>
A/T: You can make a call to the other party in a list. I[Delete]: You can delete the list of call record. J: You can view the call record. Using the Submenu of the Received Calls screen/
Details screen 1. From the Received Calls screen (See left)/Detail screen (See above), M[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items View 1 You can view details of the call record selected. Add to phonebook 2 Register a selected/displayed phone number in the history newly/additionally to a phonebook. Go to step 2 (P64) in Adding to phonebook. Send mail 3 Create i-mode mail with a destination set to a mail address saved in phonebook. Go to step 3 (P149) of Composing i-mode mail message. Delete You can delete the call record selected/displayed. Delete all 1 You can delete all the call records. Go to list 4 You can return to the screen of received call list (P86). 1: Not displayed in submenu of detail screen. 2: Not displayed if information on the caller of the call record selected is stored in the phonebook. 3: When you compose a mail on the Received Calls screen, the phone number or the mail address that the cursor is placed on at the bottom of the screen will be entered as the destination. When you compose a mail on the Detail screen, the mail address which is saved in the phonebook will be entered as the destination. However, when no mail address is registered, phone number is entered as the destination. 4: Displayed in submenu of detail screen. Settings Displaying Dialed Call Records C]
(Settings) ]112 You can view dialed call records. 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call/Answer ]
Call/Mail history ] Dialed calls The Dialed Call Records appears. Mark Description Dialed voice calls Dialed video-phone calls 2. Select a history ] C The Detail screen appears. Information See Using the Submenu of Received Calls Screen/Using the Submenu of the Detailed Screen (P86) for the display operation method and the submenus available from the Dialed call records/Detail screen. Dialed calls appears as the Redial screen when you press R on the stand-by screen. Displaying All Call Records C]
(Settings) ]113 Received and dialed call records are displayed together. 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call/Answer ]
Call/Mail history ] All calls The All calls screen appears. S e t t i n g s 87 Settings 2. Select a history ] C The Detail screen appears. Information See Using the Submenu of Received Call Records Screen / Using the Submenu of the Detailed Screen
(P86) for the display operation method and the submenus available from the All Calls screen / Detail screen. S e t t i n g s Displaying received mail history C]
(Settings) ]114 Display history of received mail. 1. From Settings menu (P85), select Call/Answer ]
Call/Mail history ] Recv. mails A history of the received mail appears. 2. Select a history ] C Detail screen appears. Information See Using the Submenu of Received mail history Screen
/ Using the Submenu of the Detailed Screen (P86) for the display operation method and the submenus available from the All Calls screen / Detail screen. Displaying sent mail history C]
(Settings) ]115 Display history of sent mail. 88 1. From Settings menu (P85), select Call/Answer ]
Call/Mail history ] Sent mails A history of sent mail appears. 2. Select a history ] C Detail screen appears. Information See Using the Submenu of Received Call Records Screen / Using the Submenu of the Detailed Screen
(P86) for the display operation method and the submenus available from the All Calls screen / Detail screen. Displaying all mail history C]
(Settings) ]116 Display history of all sent/received mail collectively. 1. From Settings menu (P85), select Call/Answer ]
Call/Mail history ] All mails A history of all mail appears. 2. Select a history ] C Detail screen appears. Information See Using the Submenu of Received mail history Screen
/ Using the Submenu of the Detailed Screen (P86) for the display operation method and the submenus available from the All Calls screen / Detail screen. Displaying Call Time C]
(Settings) ]12 You can confirm call duration for each call type. You can confirm the following items:
The displayed call duration is a standard. The real of call duration may differ. 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call/Answer ]
Call duration Call duration display appears. Last call You can confirm the last call duration. Received calls You can confirm the received call duration. Dialed calls You can confirm the dialed call duration. All calls You can confirm the total call duration. Settings To clear all the call durations ] M [Menu] ] Reset all C]
Setting Earphone/Microphone Auto Answer
(Settings) ]13 You can set how to answer an incoming call with the Flat-
plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch (option) connected. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P249 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call/Answer ]
Auto answer ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I [Done]
S e t t i n g s Auto answering You can set the earphone/microphone auto answer to ON/OFF. Delayed time (SEC) (0-120) You can set the time between receiving call and answering a call automatically. Information If the display of call time exceeds 9999999:59:59, the setting will be reset to 000000:00:00. Resetting call duration 1. Select a call duration you want to clear on the Call duration screen ] I [Reset] ]Enter your terminal security code ] C ] Yes Information During a phone number display, you can make a call by pressing the switch. While receiving a call, you can connect it by pressing the switch. During talking over a call, you can end the call by pressing the switch for 1 or more seconds. If you press the switch for 1 or more seconds while receiving a call, the call will be rejected. Next Page 89 Settings S e t t i n g s Setting to Reject/Accept Incoming Calls C]
(Settings) ]14 You can set whether to reject incoming calls. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P249 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call/Answer ]
Reject/Accept call ] Enter your terminal security code ] C The Reject/Accept call display appears. 2. Select from the following setting items Accept You can set whether to accept all incoming calls. Reject on list You can reject the incoming call from the specific parties. You can set the rejecting action and the party's phone number to reject a call by pressing I
[List] (See below). Reject all calls Silent : You can disable the ringing tone for all incoming calls. Disconnect call : You can reject all incoming calls. Memory reject call You can reject calls from parties not registered in phonebook and those with no caller IDs. Information Even when rejecting a call by Reject on list, Reject all calls, or Memory reject call, the record will be remained. 90 Setting Reject call List 1. From the Reject/Accept call display (See left), Select Reject on list ] I [List]
The Reject on list will be displayed. Mark Description The type of reject call is set to Silent. The type of reject call is set to Disconnect call. M [Menu]: You can edit/delete the list set. 2. I[Add] ] Select from the following setting items
] After setting, I[Done]
Reject types Silent : Disables the ring tone when receiving the call from the other party set to Reject number. Disconnect call : Rejects incoming calls when receiving the call from the other party set to Reject number. Reject number Enter the phone number of a caller you want to reject. You can select a phone number from the phonebook by pressing C [Search] .
: If you use M[Menu] > Edit from Reject on list, you cannot use this function. Setting an Answer Mode C]
(Settings) ]15 You can set whether to answer a voice call by pressing a button other thanA Setting item/Setting at purchase > P249 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call/Answer ]
Answer mode ] Select from the following setting items Press send key You can answer a call by pressing A only. Open flip You can answer a call by opening the FOMA phone. If the FOMA phone is already open, you can answer a call by pressing A. Press any key You can answer a call by pressing any key except for M, I, FE, G. Information This setting is not available for video phone call. Settings Call Feature Setting the Reconnect Control C]
(Settings) ]21 You can set whether to make an alarm sound to inform you when you are reconnected immediately after disconnected owing to bad radio wave conditions. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P249 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call feature ]
Reconnect alarm ] Select from the following setting items High alarm Set high alarm sounds. Low alarm Set Low alarm sounds. No alarm No sound. Information The time to reconnect the network may differ depending on the status of phone or radio (the maximum 10 seconds). The duration to reconnect the network can be chargeable. Depending on the status of phone or radio, the alarm may not sound, and the call may be disconnected. S e t t i n g s Next Page 91 S e t t i n g s Settings Setting Quality Alarm C]
(Settings) ]22 You can set whether to make an alarm sound to inform you when a call is liable to be disconnected midway because of bad radio wave conditions. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P250 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call feature ]
Quality alarm ] Select from the following setting items High alarm Set high alarm sounds. Low alarm Set low alarm sounds. No alarm No sounds. Setting Minute Reminder C]
(Settings) ]23 You can check the call duration by beep sound every minute during a voice call (Not support this function for Video-phone call). Setting item/Setting at purchase > P249 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call feature ]
Minute reminder ] ON/OFF 92 Information This setting is not available with a video-phone call. Setting Prefix Dial C]
(Settings) ]24 You can store prefix numbers such as international access code or 184 / 186 and add it to the beginning of the phone number to dial. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P249 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call feature ]
Prefix dial The Prefix Dial screen appears. 2. Select a PREFIX field to enter ] Enter a number ]
I[Done]
Setting International Dial Setting Auto assist C]
(Settings) ]251 You can set whether to automatically replace + at the beginning of a phone number with an international access code such as 009130010 for making an international call. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P249 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call feature ]
International dial ] Auto assist setting ]
Auto/OFF Setting IDD prefix C]
(Settings) ]252 You can set the international access code to be added to the beginning of a phone number for making an international call. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P249 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call feature ]
International dial ] IDD prefix setting ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I[Done]
IDD prefix name Enter the name of an international call service. IDD prefix code Enter an international access code. Setting Close setting C]
(Settings) ]26 You can set how the FOMA phone works when it is folded. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P249 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Call feature ]
Close setting ] Select from the following setting items End the call The call is disconnected. Settings Continue(Mute) Put the call on mute without emitting Continue (Mute) holding sound. In this case, your voice is not heard to the other party. Information During video-phone call, if you close the flip, the call will be disconnected regardless of this setting. Video-Phone You can change settings for the video-phone operation and display. Changing the Video-Phone Settings C]
(Settings) ]31 You can set how the FOMA phone works and screens when making a video-phone call. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P250 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Video-phone ]
Video-phone settings ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I[Done]
VoiceCall AutoSwitch Sets whether to redial by automatically switching to a voice call if the other party is unable to answer a video-phone call. S e t t i n g s Next Page 93 Settings Display setting You can set how to display the Talking screen. Both : Your image and the other partys image are displayed. Other : Only the other partys image is displayed. Me : Only your image is displayed. Sub screen You can set an image to be displayed on the sub screen when Display setting for video phone call is set to Both. Me : Your image is displayed on sub screen and the other party's image is displayed on main screen. Other : The other partys image is displayed on sub screen and your image is displayed on main screen. Send camera image You can set whether to send your image to the other party. If set to OFF, a substitutive image is sent to the other party. Sending img. quality Prefer image quality : Sends images laying stress on image quality. Prefer image quality is effective if there is little motion. Normal : Sends images in standard quality and motion speed. Prefer motion quality : Sends images laying stress on motion speed. Prefer motion speed is effective if there is much motion. Display light Always on : Keeps the display lit during a call. S e t t i n g s 94 Terminal setting : Follows the settings of the Main display of the Backlight. >P83 Hands-free V.phone Set whether to enable handsfree function during video-phone calls. Selecting a Video-phone Image Changing Substitutive images C]
(Settings) ]321 You can set a substitutive image to send in place of your own image during a video-phone call. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P250 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Video-phone ]
Image settings ] Substitutive image ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I[Done]
Image Default Image : The image by default. Selected image : You can select an image other than the default image from the Image list. Image list You can select an image for when Image is set to Selected image. Select from images stored in My picture of Data box. > P166 Changing Response Hold Image C]
(Settings) ]322 You can set an image to display when you put the call on hold during ringing of a video-phone call. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P250 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Video-phone ]
Image settings ] Response hold image See Changing Substitutive image (P94) for the subsequent operations. Changing On-hold Images C]
(Settings) ]323 You can set an image to display when you put the call on hold. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P250 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Video phone ]
Image settings ] On-hold image See Changing Substitutive image (P94) for the subsequent operations. Date & Time Setting Time C]
(Settings) ]41 You can set the time of city which is already set Home
(the city at purchase: Tokyo) by World time (P187). Settings Setting item/Setting at purchase > P250 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Select Date &
Time ] Set time ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I[Done]
Set time Press J to select an input item (hour, minute, second, am/pm ). Use the numeric keys to enter numbers. Press C to switch between am/pm . Time format You can set whether to display time in the 12-hour format or in the 24-hour format. Hour indication You can set whether the alarm will sound or not after setting (00 min). You can select the ring tone as an alarm. If you do not want this indication, set to OFF.
: Displayed if Time format is set to 12-hour. Setting Date C]
(Settings) ]42 You can set the date. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P250 S e t t i n g s 95 Settings 1. From the Settings menu (P85) ] Select Date &
Time ] Set date ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I[Done]
Set date Press J to select an input item (year, month, date). Use the numeric keys to enter numbers. Date format You can change display formats of the date.
(DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD)
: YYYY stands for Year, MM stands for Month, and DD stands for Day. Setting Daylight Saving C]
(Settings) ]43 You can set daylight saving time. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Date & Time ]
Daylight saving ] ON/OFF S e t t i n g s 96 Network (for overseas use) Selecting the Network Connection Mode Making settings for Network search C]
(Settings) ]51 You can select a network setting method in case destination networks (Communication carriers) change for overseas use, etc. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Network ]
Network selection ] Select from the following setting items Auto Automatically searches for the network for setting. Manual The network search display appears, allowing you to select a network from the list displayed after search. Information It may take a few minutes to find the network. If you set Auto, you can search the network automatically in the following situation. When you switch on Out of the service area If you stop searching the network by Manual, the setting will be changed to Auto. Setting the Network Mode C]
(Settings) ]52 You can set a type of network to search for when networks are searched according to Network selection. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Network ]
Network mode ] Select from the following setting items Auto Searches all the networks connectable. WCDMA only Searches only networks supporting 3G. GSM only Searches only networks supporting GSM/GPRS. Information You cannot exchange the data through packet service under GSM network. When using the FOMA handset in Japan or in the service area of 3G network, we recommend you change the setting of the Network mode to WCDMA only to save battery power. Settings Registering a Network of Preferred list C]
(Settings) ]53 Setting Networks When you search the network automatically, you can add a preferable network (communication carrier) to connect to. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Network ]
Preferred lists Networks registered in UIM are listed downward from the one with the highest priority. I[Delete]: You can delete the network selected. 2. M[Menu] ] Select from the following setting items S e t t i n g s Add new
- Search network You can select from the network list stored in the FOMA phone for adding.
- Enter new network You can enter the country code (MCC) and the network code (MNC) for adding. After setting, press I[Done]. Delete You can delete the selected network. 97 Settings Move up You can move the selected network upward. The network moved upward is more preferred. Move down You can move the selected network downward. The network moved downward is less preferred.
: If you register multiple networks, you can use this menu. S e t t i n g s Information If the network is not registered, [Menu], [Delete] of soft key area on preferred list to register will not be displayed. To add new network, press I [Add], select and register. The registered data is saved in UIM. Displaying the Network Name C]
(Settings) ]54 You can set whether to display the name of the network currently set on the Stand-by display. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Network ]
Network name display ] Display on/Display off Changing a Host from i-mode Setting / Changing the Host C]
(Settings) ]6 Normally, you do not need to change the setting. You can set a host to use services of various providers other than i-mode. If the host is changed, i-mode becomes unavailable. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Host selection ]
From the Host selection screen, I [Add] ] Enter your terminal security code ]C ]Set the following items ]After setting, I [Done]
The host set is displayed on the Host selection screen with attached to it. Host name Enter the name displayed on the Host selection screen. Host address Enter the address of the host. Access point Enter the Access point (URL, etc.). 98 Information To switch the host back to i-Mode or to switch to another host, select i-Mode/other hosts and press C on the Host selection screen. If you press M [Menu] on the Host selection screen, you can edit / delete / display the host set. Note that you cannot edit /
delete pre-installed i-Mode. In Access point menu, you should enter IP address in PDP type. Security Setting All Lock C]
(Settings) ]71 You can set whether to lock requiring to enter the terminal security code to operate function. During All Lock, All lock is displayed on the Stand-by display. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Security ] All lock ] Select from the following setting items Power on You can set whether to lock the FOMA phone when you turn of the power. You need to enter your terminal security code to set it. Settings Immediate Sets All lock immediately. You need to enter your terminal security code to set it. none You can release All lock. You need to enter your terminal security code to release it. Information S e t t i n g s While All lock is set, even though you receive an SMS, it is only saved, and it is received after you release All lock. While All lock is set, you cannot perform packet transmission connecting a personal computer. While All lock is set, answering operation is not performed even though you receive a call, and only busy tone is played. It is displayed as a missed call after you release All lock. While All lock is set, you can receive mails and messageR/F. However, the screen of receiving messageR/F or receiving result of the message will not appear, and only the icon appears. While All lock is set, the alarm tone does not sound, and only the icon appears. The alarm tone sounds after you release All lock. Releasing All Lock 1. Press one of 1~0 ] Enter your terminal security code ] C Pressing I [Emergency Call] key on the lock screen:
Emergency calls (110/118/119) can be made. Next Page 99 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Security ]
Change password ] PIN1 code/PIN2 code Change PIN1 code Current PIN1 code. R:3 New PIN1 code Verify PIN1 code The remaining time to enter PIN is available
<Change PIN1 code>
2. Enter the current PIN1 code/PIN2 code ] C 3. Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code ] C 4. Enter the same code that you did in Step 3 again ]
C Information If you enter a wrong PIN code over 3 times, the PIN code will be locked automatically. If you unlock the PIN code, see Releasing PIN lock code (P105). Settings Display may differ depending on the used UIM. If you enter a wrong terminal security code 5 times in a row, the handset turns off automatically. When you turn on the power again, you can enter the terminal security code. S e t t i n g s Setting PIN Code Request C]
(Settings) ]72 You can set to enter PIN1 code every time you turn on the power to the FOMA phone. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Security ] PIN code request ] ON/OFF ] Enter PIN1 code ]
C Changing Your Password Changing the PIN1 code / PIN2 code C]
C]
(Settings) ]731 /
(Settings) ]732 You can change the PIN1 code / PIN2 code. To change the PIN1 code, you need to set PIN code request to ON beforehand. The code is set to 0000 at purchase, but you can change to any number as desired. In case you purchase a new FOMA phone and start using it inserting the UIM you have been using, use the PIN1 code / PIN2 code you have set. 100 Changing Your Terminal Security Code C]
(Settings) ]733 You can change your terminal security code. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Security ]
Change password ] Security code For the subsequent steps, just like the steps to change the PIN1 code / PIN2 code, enter your current terminal security code, enter a new terminal security code and then enter the same code again for confirmation. C]
(Settings) ]8 You can switch the languages of the FOMA phone between Japanese and English. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85),
/English Information This setting is registered in FOMA phone and UIM which is currently inserted. If you insert other UIM which registered other settings, the settings of this UIM will be preferred. Settings Others Settings Checking the Memory Status C]
(Settings) ]91 You can check the usage status and available space of the memories of the handset of the FOMA phone. 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Others ] Memory status ] Select from the following items Data box You can check the empty or the reserved capacity
(Approximate) of the Data box for data such as My picture, i-motion or Melody are stored. Personal info. You can check the empty or the reserved capacity
(Approximate) of the memory for Personal info. for data such as Phonebook, Schedule, Memo or Date Counter. UIM memory You can check the empty or the reseved capacity
(Approximate) of the memory for data such as Phonebook or SMS. Resetting the Settings Clearing the Memory C]
(Settings) ]921 You can clear all the data recorded in the FOMA phone. S e t t i n g s 101 Settings 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Others ] Reset settings ] Clear memory ] Select from the following items You need to enter your terminal security code for deleting. Data box Clears all the data saved in the Data box folder of the FOMA phone. Personal info. Clears all the personal data saved in the FOMA phone such as phonebooks, schedule, call history and so on. S e t t i n g s Initializing the Default Settings C]
(Settings) ]922 You can reset to all settings at purchase except for i-mode setting and Mail setting. 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Others ] Reset settings ] Default settings ] Yes ] Enter the terminal security code ] Press C Information When the date and time are reset, display or play of i-motion and files with valid period and/or expiration date set may be disabled. 102 Changing the Settings for the SMS Center C]
(Settings) ]93 Normally, you do not need to change the settings. You can change the SMS centers to use. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P252 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Others ] SMS center ] Select from the following setting items
] After setting, I [Done]
SMSC DoCoMo : You can use the DoCoMo SMS center. Others : You can use another companys SMS center. Address If SMSC is set to Others, enter the address of the SMS center. Resetting the holiday C]
(Settings) ]94 You can reset all settings of holiday of FOMA phone to settings at purchase. 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Others ] Reset holiday ] Yes Safety settings Passwords ............................................104 Preventing the Phone from Activating the Operation of Function ..105 Other Safety Settings...........................106 103 Safety settings Passwords For some functions of the FOMA, you need to enter your password. In addition to the Terminal security Code for operating respective mobile phone functions, the Network Security Code to use network services, and i-mode password are available. These passwords help you utilize your FOMA phone. S a f e t y s e t t i n g s Information for Passwords Do not use easily-perceived figures such as Birthday, the part of phone number, Area code or Room number, 1111, 1234 to prevent it from being guessed by others. Note that you make a memo of the password you set. Make sure that prevent the password from being known by others. If the password is known by third party, NTT DoCoMo will not have any other responsibility concerning the mischief or the misuse of handset. There is no requesting the client's password from NTT DoCoMo. Note that if you do not remember password, you need to bring an identification card such as a driver's license, FOMA handset, UIM to a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. For details, consult DoCoMo Information Center described on the back of this manual. 104 Terminal security code The terminal security code is set 0000 at purchase. You can change the terminal security code. To change the code, see Changing Your Terminal Security Code (P100). e
(DoCoMo e-site). The Network Network security code The Network Security Code is a 4-digit number required for using various network services and for various procedures at the Password is determined at the time of contract and can be changed by the user. The user who has an ID and a password of My DoCoMo , the integrated support site for PC, can change the network security code through PC. And, the user can change various procedures of DoCoMo e-
site in i-mode. For My DoCoMo, DoCoMo e-site, see the back of this manual. i-mode Password The i-mode password is a 4-digit password required for registering, deleting My-menu, Messaging service, applying for or canceling an i-mode service (charged) (The service provider may supply its own password). The default for i-mode password is 0000, but you can change it. If you change the password from i-mode, see Changing (P136). PIN1 code/PIN2 code For the UIM, you can set the 2 security codes, namely the PIN1 code / PIN2 code. The default for these security codes are 0000, but you can change these codes as you like. To change the codes, see Setting PIN Code Request (P100), Changing the PIN1 code / PIN2 code
(P100). a PIN1 Code The PIN1 code is the 4-to 8-digit code for checking the user each time the UIM is inserted into the FOMA phone or each time the FOMA phone is turned on so that you can prevent the third party from using your UIM. If you enter PIN1 code, you can receive or make a call or activate the operation. a PIN2 Code The PIN2 code is the 4-to 8-digit code for using the user certificate or applying for the issue of it and performing reset All Calls. This FOMA phone does not have this function. Information If you purchase a new FOMA phone and use the existing UIM with new FOMA phone, use PIN1 code and PIN2 code you have set previously. If you enter a wrong PIN1 code / PIN2 code 3 times in a row on the display requiring its entry, the PIN1 code / PIN2 code is locked automatically. To unlock the code, you need to enter PIN lock release code. Safety settings Releasing PIN lock code PIN lock releasing code is a 8-digit password to release locking PIN1 code / PIN2 code. You cannot change it. Information If you enter a wrong PIN unlock code 10 times in a row, it is automatically locked. In this case, you need to bring the FOMA phone, UIM and an identification card such as a driver's license to a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. Preventing the Phone from Activating the Operation of Function To protect the information or data in FOMA phone, you can activate the security function to prevent from activating the operation or the function. S a f e t y s e t t i n g s Setting All Lock After locking FOMA phone, you need to enter terminal password to activate the phone. To set this function, see Setting All Lock (P99). 105 Safety settings Setting not to display mail without permission You can set the security function for the Inbox, Outbox, and Unsent of the Mail menu. For setting this function, see Display of Mail setting (P156). S a f e t y s e t t i n g s Other Safety Settings The FOMA phone has the following safety settings in addition to the Security function:
Purpose Function/Service Reference To reject calls from specified callers To receive calls from callers registered in the phonebook Not to take nuisance calls Not to take calls from callers not notifying caller ID To receive necessary mail only Reject/Accept call Memory reject call P90 P90 Nuisance call barring P202 Caller ID request Receive option P203 P154 106 Purpose To change the mail address Receive/reject only mail between i-mode terminals Receive/reject mail from specified domains Receive/reject mail from specified addresses To reject 200th and succeeding i-mode messages sent from a single i-mode phone on the same day To reject unsolicited Ad mail To reject SMS reception To store/check safety information when a disaster occurs To stop the mail function temporarily To check the settings for the mail function Function/Service Change mail address Reference Measures for nuisance mail (reception/rejection setting) Receive from specified domain Refer to Mobile Phone User's Guide
[i-mode]
Selected Mail Senders Reject unsolicited Ad mail/Reject mail Set/Confirm SMS Rejection Settings i-mode Disaster Message Board Service Suspend Mail Stop the mail function Confirm Settings Multimedia (Camera) Multimedia Multimedia 1 Camera-mode 2 Movie-mode 3 Camera settings Select Select To display the Multimedia menu On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(Multimedia) or Multimedia Notes for using the camera .......................108 Using the Camera ......................................109 Shooting Still Images .................................109 Shooting Moving Images...........................115 Setting Camera...........................................118 107 The camera has been made with highly precise technologies, but there may be points or lines that always look bright as well as pixels and lines that always look dim. Also, be aware that when shooting an image in a place where light intensity is small, it looks a little rough or noises such as white lines increase. If the battery becomes low level before saving images, you are not able to save still or moving shot images. Since the camera consumes electric power quickly, do not operate the camera or leave it for a long time. It may take a long time until images are displayed on the shooting display after starting the camera depending on the settings. Images shot by the camera may differ from actual subjects in color tone and brightness. To prevent from taking a picture without permission, the shutter tone sound even on manner mode. Also, even when the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch (option) is attached to the FOMA phone, the shutter tone sound from the speaker. Multimedia (Camera) Notes for using the camera If the lens is stained with finger prints or something oily, you cannot shoot clear images. Clean the lens with a soft cloth before shooting images. If the lens is exposed to direct sunlight for a long time, the color filter inside and images may be discolored. If shooting or saving images after leaving the FOMA phone in a warm place for a long time, image quality may deteriorate. Do not cover the lens with fingers, etc. when shooting images. When the battery level is low, you may not be able to activate camera and movie mode. When shooting a fast moving subject, it may be recorded a little off the displayed position or the image may be blurred. Be careful not to move your hands when taking a shot. Hold the FOMA phone securely with your hands so that it does not move, or place the FOMA phone in a stable place and use the self timer when taking a shot. When moving your hands when shooting a moving image or when shooting a rapidly moving image, the image may be blurred. When trying to directly shoot a strong illuminant such as the sun or a lamp, the image may become dim or blurred. 108 M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) Copyrights and Rights of Portrait You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the contents of which a third party holds the copyright such as text, images, music, or software downloaded from web pages on the Internet, or images shot by the cameras of this product without permission from the copyright holder except for when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed by the Copyright Law. Note that it may be prohibited to shoot or record live performances or exhibitions even for personal use. Make sure that you refrain from taking portraits of other persons and distributing such portraits over the Internet without consent, as this violates portrait rights. Please respect the privacy of individuals around you when taking and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile phones. Multimedia (Camera) Using the Camera You can adjust the angle of the camera on setting the scene of a person, an landscape or a portrait. Information If you shoot an image by adjusting the lens within the FOMA phone as shown above, the image is saved as mirror image. Shooting Still Images C]
(Multimedia) ]1 Still images can be shot. The still images you take are saved to Camera folder or its sub folders of My picture in Data box of the FOMA phone. A saving folder can be set from Auto Saving (P118). Next Page 109 M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) Multimedia (Camera) 1. In Stand-by mode, press G Menu Rec. Album
<Still Image Finder Stand-by>
H/FE: You can set the magnification of the image. J: You can change the brightness of the image. I[Album]: You can view the Camera folder of My picture. T: Flip the image vertically. 2. After confirming the subject, C Saved Saved Menu OK Mail
<Still Image Shooting End>
I[Mail]: You can compose the message with attaching the image. Go to step 2 on page 149 of Composing i-mode mail. 110 M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) C[OK]: Return to the Still Image Finder Stand-by screen. M[Menu]: You can perform the operations such as deleting the picture in submenu. > P113 Q: Return to Still Image Finder Stand-by screen without saving the shot image. a When Auto Saving is set to OFF Press C [Save] immediately after shooting an image and go to the next step. When not saving the shot image, press I [Cancel]. For Auto Saving > P118 My picture Camera Files Data transfer File Item Files Pre-installed Menu Open File Switch
<Still image saving screen>
I[Save]: After deciding the folder to save the image, the finishing screen of shooting still image is displayed. C[Open]: Opens a selected folder. M[Menu]: A submenu opens. > P114 After taking a multishot After setting a multishot (P112) and taking multiple images, you can view the display as below. Camera [1/3]
Menu View Mail The file size of selected one
<Screen multishot shooting End>
C[View]: You can view the selected file using zooming. I[Mail]: You can compose i-mode mail with attaching the selected file. Go to step 2 on page 149 of Composing i-mode Mail. Q: Returns to Still Image Finder Stand-by screen to take a picture. Multimedia (Camera) Icons on the Still Image Finder Stand-by Screen Indicates the status of the still image shot setting. Icon 1 169 2 Description Camera mode (Still image shot mode) File size restriction No restriction 100KB 9KB Super fine Fine Normal Storage image quality setup Multishot Auto timer Zoom Brightness Size Remaining number of shots M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) 1: The remaining number of shots varies depending on the settings of shooting. 2 : The selected value is displayed. If Size is set to 128X96 and Quality is set to Normal, the savable number of still images is approx. 8000. Next page 111 Multimedia (Camera) Using the Submenus of the Still Image Finder Stand-by Screen You can set up functions to shoot still images. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P254 1. From the Still Image Finder Stand-by screen (P110), M [Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items using J ] Select a setting item ] C ] I
[Close]
Rotate Set to rotate the view. You can rotate the view also by pressing T on Still Image Finder Stand-by screen. Size You can set the photo size. Quality You can set the image quality to store shots of still images. Multishot You can set the number of continuous shots of still images to be taken by pushing the shutter. Zoom You can set the magnification of the image. Brightness You can set brightness (exposure) of the image. M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) 112 White balance You can revise the color tone for the image. This setting is for a shot image with an unnatural color tone. Night mode This setting is for when taking a shot in a dark place, etc. Frame shot This setting is for when taking a shot with a frame attached to the subject. Select Choose Frame and select a frame using J > Press C. Auto timer You can set Auto timer. Select the number of seconds between pressing the shutter and taking a shot. Effect This setting is for when taking a shot with special effect applied to the image. Size restriction You can restrict the size of still images to store. Information If taking a shot with the size set to 1280x1024, you cannot use the zoom. If Multishot is set, still images are automatically saved even if Auto Saving is set to OFF. If Multishot is set, the Size automatically changes to 320x240. After setting Multishot, you cannot change the size. If the Frame shot is set, the size automatically changes to 176x220. After setting the Frame shot, you cannot change the size. You cannot set Multishot and Frame shot at the same time. If you are unable to store images in the size set in File size restriction, automatically lower the resolution to store images. If you set File size restriction to 9KB,
- You cannot set Quality.
- You can set Size only to 128 x 96 or 176 x 144. If you set File size restriction to 100KB,
- You cannot set Quality.
- You cannot set Size to 1280 x 1024. For the frame image stored by default, see Frame (P250) in Data stored by default. Multimedia (Camera) Using the submenus of the Still Image Shooting End Screen Setting item/Setting at purchase > P255 1. From the Still Image Shooting End screen (P110) /
Multishot Shooting End Screen (P111), M[Menu]
] Select from the following submenu items New picture Returns to Still Image Shooting screen. Mark/Unmark You can delete the file shot by multishot. After selecting a file, press M [Menu] > Delete. Mark : You can mark a file at a time. Mark all : You can mark all the files collectively. Unmark : You can unmark the file marked by Mark or one of the files marked by Mark all at a time. Unmark all : You can unmark the file marked by Mark or all the files marked by Mark all. Send via mail You can attach shots of still images to i-mode mail for sending. Go to step 2 (P149) of Composing i-mode mail message. Delete (Selected shot ) You can delete a shot of a still image. Set as wallpaper Set as wallpaper for Main display or Sub display. 113 M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) Save to current folder After deciding the current folder as the folder to save the image, the finishing screen of shooting still image is displayed. New folder Create a folder. Delete Delete a selected folder. Sort by Sort folders. View by Change the folder display method. Memory info. Display states, etc. of storage area in phone memory, etc. Folder property Display the name, size, number of included files and other information of a selected folder.
: Unavailable for folders set at purchase. Multimedia (Camera) Slide show Go : You can display still images shot in Multishot in order. Settings : You can set up View as and Time interval (secs) for slide show. After setting, press I[Done]. Make animated GIF You can select multiple files to create animation. After selecting files, press I[Make]. Sort by You can sort files. View by You can change file display methods. File property You can display the name, size and type of the file being selected.
: Displayed only after taking images in Multishot. Using submenu on still image saving screen Setting items/Setting at purchase > P258 1. Press M[Menu] on still image saving screen
(P110) ] Select the next submenu item Open Open a selected folder. 114 M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) Shooting Moving Images 2. After confirming the subject, C Multimedia (Camera) C]
(Multimedia) ]2 Moving images can be shot. Shot moving images are saved to Camera folder or its sub folders of i-motion in Data box of the FOMA phone. A saving folder can be set from Auto Saving. (P110) 1. From the Multimedia menu (P107), Movie-mode Menu Rec. Album
< Moving Image Finder Stand-by>
H/FE: You can change the magnification of the images. J: You can change the brightness of the images. I[Album]: You can view the folder of Camera in i-motion. T: Flip the image vertically. You cannot flip the image vertically while shooting moving image. Illuminates in red during shot. Shot elapsed time/maximum shot time Stop Shot elapsed time is displayed with a bar.
<Moving Image Shooting>
H/FE: You can change the magnification of an image. Q: If you press this key on recording, the moving image is not saved, and return to Stand-by mode to take a picture. C[Stop]: Press this key to end the camera and return to the screen of step 3. 3. The shooting is ended. Saved Saved Menu OK Mail
<Moving Image Shooting End>
Next page 115 M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) Multimedia (Camera) I[Mail]: You can compose i-mode mail with attaching the selected file. Go to step 2 on page 149 of Composing i-mode mail. C[OK]: Return to the Moving Image Finder Stand-by screen. M[Menu]: You can delete the picture in submenu.
> P117 Q: Return to Still Image Finder Stand-by screen without saving the shot image. a When Auto Saving is set to OFF Press C [Save] immediately after shooting an image and go to the next step. When not saving the shot image, press I [Cancel]. For Auto Saving > P118 My picture Camera Files Data transfer File Item Files Pre-installed Menu Open File Save
<Still image saving screen>
I[Save]: After deciding the folder to save the image, the finishing screen of shooting moving image is displayed. C[Open]: Opens a selected folder. M[Menu]: A submenu opens. > P117 116 M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) Icons on the Moving Image Finder Stand-by Screen Indicates the status of the moving image shot setting. Icon Description Movie mode (Taking a moving image) Recording time (for Mail) Movie type Sound+Video Video only Sound only See Icons on the Still Image Finder Stand-by Screen
(P111) for other icons.
: The recording time of a moving image can be set up to 30 minutes. If Quality is set to Super fine and Type is set to Sound+Video", the preservation time of the recorded movie is approx. 80 minutes. The preservation time varies depending on the set shooting condition. Using the Submenu of the Moving Image Finder Stand-by Screen You can set up functions to shoot moving images. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P255 1. From the Moving Image Finder Stand-by screen
(P115), M [Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items using J ] Select a setting item ]
C ] I [Close]
Rotate Set to shoot a rotated image. You can rotate the view also by pressing T on Still Image Finder Stand-by screen. Quality You can set the image quality to store shots of moving images. Zoom You can set up the magnification of the images. Brightness You can set up brightness (exposure) of the images. White balance You can revise the color tone for the images. This setting is for shot images with an unnatural color tone. Night mode This setting is for when shooting a shot in a dark place, etc. Effect This setting is for when shooting a shot with special effect applied to the image. Recording time You can set the recording time for moving images. Type You can set whether or not images / sound are recorded when shooting moving images. Multimedia (Camera) Information If Recording time is set to Mail attach, the recording time varies depending on the Quality setting. Using the Submenus of Moving Image Shooting End Screen 1. From the Moving Image Shooting End screen
(P115), M [Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items New movie The Finder screen returns. Send via mail You can attach shot moving images to i-mode mail for sending. Go to step 2 (P149) of Composing i-mode mail message. Delete You can delete shot moving images. Using submenu on moving image saving screen Setting items/Setting at purchase > P259 1. Press M [Menu] on moving image saving screen
(P116) ] Select one of the submenu items given below Open Open a selected folder. 117 M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) Multimedia (Camera) Save to current folder After deciding the current folder as the folder to save the image, the finishing screen of shooting still image is displayed. New folder Create a folder. Delete Delete a selected folder. Sort by Sort folders. View by Change the folder display method. Memory info. Display states, etc. of storage area in the phone memory. Folder property Display the name, size, number of included files and other information of a selected folder.
: Unavailable for folders set at purchase. Setting Camera C]
(Multimedia) ]3 Camera functions for shooting still and/or moving images can be set. 1. Select Camera settings from Multimedia menu
(P107) ] Select one of the following items to be set Saving option Set whether to automatically save shot still or moving image. Use J to set ON/OFF. When ON, set the saving destination of still or moving image. After setting, press I [Done]. Shutter sound Set a sound to be emitted when the shutter is pressed. When an item is selected, a sample sound is emitted. Flicker tuning Set suppressing flickering of the screen. Information Depending on the shooting environment and/or object tone, flickering may not be completely suppressed by setting Flicker tuning. M u l t i m e d a i
C a m e r a
) 118 i-mode Menu ........................................120 What is i-mode? ...................................120 Displaying the iMenu display...............120 Displaying Sites from Bookmark .........121 Displaying Screen memo .....................122 Displaying Last URL.............................123 Displaying Internet Web Pages ...........123 Displaying MessageR/F .......................124 Checking Whether Center Holds MessageR/F .........................................127 Setting Functions of i-mode ................127 Displaying Sites....................................130 How to See/Use Sites ..........................132 Using My Menu ....................................135 Changing i-mode Password ................136 i-mode M e n u i-mode Select Select To display the i-mode menu On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(i-mode) or i-mode 119 i-mode i-mode Menu What is i-mode?
The i-mode menu is the basic display for viewing various sites and Internet web pages. You can use each function of i-mode from the i-mode menu. Menu item Menu Bookmark Screen memo i
m o d e Last URL Go to location Message Check new message i-mode setting Description Connects to the i-mode Center Displays your favorite sites and Internet web pages. Displays pages of sites, etc. saved in the FOMA phone. Displays the most recently accessed site or Internet web page. Enter URL to connect to the internet. Displays a list of the received MessageR/F. You can check whether the i-mode Center holds mail and MessageR/F. You can set the FOMA functions related to i-mode. i-mode is the online service that makes use of the display of the i-mode phone to enable you to use convenient information from i-mode sites (programs) and homepages supporting i-mode and to exchange mail easily. Refer to Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] for details. Not all the services described in Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] are supported. Check the description of the models supporting each service with Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]. Displaying the iMenu display C]
(i-mode) ]1 You can access each i-mode site from iMenu. 1. From the i-mode menu (P119), iMenu Refer to Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] for items displayed on the iMenu display. See Displaying Sites (P130) for the subsequent operations. 120 Displaying Sites from Bookmark C]
(i-mode) ]2 You can directly access your favorite sites from Bookmark. For the registration method, see Using the Submenus of the Site Screen (P130). 1. From the i-mode menu (P119), Bookmark
<Bookmark List>
2. Select a bookmark ] C Connected to the site. Using the Submenus of the Bookmark List Screen 1. From the Bookmark List screen (See above), M
[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Connect You can connect to the selected Bookmark site. i-mode Edit bookmark You can edit the title and URL of the selected Bookmark. After editing, press I [Done]. Delete You can delete the selected Bookmark. Delete selected You can select and delete multiple Bookmarks. After selecting, M [Menu]>Select Delete Delete all You can delete all the registered Bookmarks. To delete all, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. URL You can display the URL of the selected Bookmark. Copy URL You can copy the URL of the selected Bookmark. For the copy, see Copying/Cutting/Pasting (P219). Compose message You can paste the URL of the selected Bookmark to the text of i-mode mail and send it. Go to step 2 of Composing i-mode mail (P149). Send Send a selected bookmark via infrared communication. Send all Send all bookmarks via infrared communication.
: For infrared communication, see Using infrared communication
(P182). i
m o d e 121 i-mode Displaying Screen memo C]
(i-mode) ]3 You can display the web pages saved without connecting to i-mode. For the registration method for the site screen, see Using the submenus for the Site screen (P130). 1. From the i-mode menu (P119), Screen memo Icon Description Unprotected Screen memo Protected Screen memo
<Screen Memo List>
2. Select a screen memo ] C The Screen Memo List screen appears. i
m o d e Using the Submenus of the Screen Memo Screen 1. From the Screen memo List screen (See above) M [Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items View You can display the selected screen memo. Edit title You can edit the title of the selected screen memo. Delete You can delete the selected screen memo. Delete selected You can select and delete multiple screen memos. After selecting, M [Menu]>Select Delete. Delete all You can delete all the screen memos. To delete all, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. URL You can display the URL of the selected screen memo. Protect ON/OFF You can give or cancel protection for the selected screen memo. You cannot delete protected screen memos. 122 Using the Submenus of the Screen Memo Screen 1. From the Screen memo display See left M [Menu]
] Select from the following submenu items Save graphics 1 You can select and save an image contained in a screen memo. You can confirm the saved image by My picture of Data box>i-mode folder. >P166 Show properties URL : You can display the URL of the displayed screen memo. Page properties : You can check the title and URL of the displayed screen memo. Certificates 2 : You can display the certificate used by the displayed screen memo. Retry 3 A GIF animation is played back from the beginning. Edit title You can edit the title of the displayed screen memo. Delete You can delete the displayed screen memos. Protect ON/OFF You can activate or cancel protection for the displayed the page. You cannot delete protected saved pages. 1: This menu is not selected in case the selected screen memo does not include an image. i-mode 2: This menu is not selected in case the certificate is not used for the displayed screen memo. 3: This menu is not selected in case the selected screen memo does not include of GIF animation. Displaying Last URL C]
(i-mode) ]4 When you exit i-mode, the URL of the page displayed last is stored as Last URL. Using Last URL, you can connect to the site or Internet web page you visited last time. 1. From the i-mode menu (P119), Last URL ] I
[Done]
Information If you press C in screen of URL, you can edit the latest URL address. i
m o d e Displaying Internet Web Pages C]
(i-mode) ]5 You can display web pages supporting i-mode and directly access sites from the history of the sites you visited by entering their URLs. Next Page 123 i-mode 1. From the i-mode menu (P119), Go to location ]
Select from the following items Input address You can display Internet web pages supporting i-mode by entering URLs. After entering, press I [Done] to access. URL history You can directly access sites by selecting URLs you visited from the URL history. Information You can enter URL up to 256 half-pitch characters. You can view the list up to 50 address in URL history. Depending on the type of the accessed Internet site, the page may not be displayed correctly. Web pages other than Internet web pages supporting i-mode i
m o d e may not be displayed correctly. Using the Submenus of the URL Screen 1. From URL history screen, press M [Menu] ]
Select from the following submenu items Connect You can connect the site in URL history. Edit URL You can connect URL in history after editing URL address. 124 Delete You can delete the history of URL. Delete all You can delete the history of all registered URL. To delete all, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. Compose message You can compose i-mode mail with attaching URL to the text. Go to step 2 on page 149 of Composing i-
mode mail. Displaying MessageR/F C]
(i-mode) ]6 You can display received MessagesR/F. MessageR:
Your required information is delivered automatically once you apply for the message service on the site providing the service. MessageF:
Messages are delivered free of charge by performing the Received settings in the option settings. Refer to Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] for how to set it up.
: If you subscribed to the FOMA service after October 1, 2004, the setting at purchase is Receive. i-mode Information You can save up to 100 MessageR and up to 50 MessageF. Depending on the size of messages, the number of savable messages may be smaller. If a message is attached to the received MessageR/F, the melody will be played automatically when you display the message. Icons on the MessageR/F List Screen and the Display MessageR/F Screen Icon Description Unread MessageR/F Read MessageR/F Protected MessageR/F MessageR/F with a file attached or pasted Subject Received date and time A melody is pasted. A melody is attached. An image is attached. A file with the UIM operation restriction function set up is attached. Next Page 125 i-mode Using the Submenus of the MessageR/F List Screen Setting item/Setting at purchase > P256 1. From the MessageR/F List (P125), M [Menu] ]
Select from the following submenu items Using the Submenus of the Display MessageR/F Screen 1. From the Display MessageR/F screen (P125), M [Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Delete You can delete the selected MessageR/F. Delete selected You can select and delete multiple MessagesR/F. After selecting, M [Menu] > Select Delete. Delete all You can delete all the MessagesR/F. To delete all, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. Protect ON/OFF You can give or cancel protection for the selected MessageR/F. You cannot delete protected MessagesR/F. Sort You can sort MessagesR/F displayed on the List screen. Filter You can change types of the MessageR/F displayed on the List screen. i
m o d e 126 Delete You can delete the displayed MessageR/F. Protect ON/OFF You can give or cancel protection for the displayed MessageR/F. You cannot delete protected MessagesR/F. Add to phonebook 1 You can add phone number or mail address displayed on the MessageR/F to phonebook. Go to step 2 on page 64 of Adding to Phonebook. Save attach file 2 You can save the melody (
attached to the MessageR/F. You can view the saved melody or the image in Melody/My picture of Data box > i-mode folder. > P166, P176
) or image (
) 1: Activate this menu after selecting the phone number or mail address that can be registered. If no item exists, you cannot activate this function. 2: You can activate this function after selecting the file saved in. If the file to save does not exist, you cannot use this file. Automatically Receiving MessageR/F If you are in the FOMA service area, MessageR/F are sent automatically. 1. Receive a MessageR or MessageF
(White) or
(White) is displayed. 2. The reception results are displayed To confirm the received MessageR/F immediately, select MessageR/MessageF and press C. Q: Returns to previous screen. i-mode Checking Whether Center Holds MessageR/F C]
(i-mode) ]7 You can check whether the i-mode Center holds any i-
mode mail and/or MessageR/F that arrived while the phone was out of the service area or turned off. 1. From the Stand-by screen, press M [Mail] for 2 or more seconds The Check Result screen appears. To read the received MessageR/F immediately, select MessageR/MessageF and press C. Information If the i-mode Center holds i-mode mail and/or a MessageR/F, an icon (P31) is displayed. Note that the icon may not be displayed if i-mode mail or a MessageR/F arrived at the i-mode Center while the FOMA phone was turned off. i
m o d e Setting Functions of i-mode You can set functions of i-mode and MessageR/F. 127 i-mode Home C]
(i-mode) ]81 You can set the URL of a web page displayed when Home is selected and whether to enable/disable Home (P121). Setting items/Setting at purchase > P234 1. From the i-mode menu (P119), i-mode setting ]
Home 2.Enable or Disable 3. Select the URL field ] C ] Enter a URL ] C If
[Done] Disable is selected, you cannot enter a URL. 4. I [Done]
View i
m o d e C]
(i-mode) ]82 You can set functions related to displaying sites and screen memos. Setting at purchase > P234, 235 1. From the i-mode menu (P119), i-mode setting ]
View ] Select from the following setting items ]
After setting, I[Done]
Character size You can change the character size for text of sites, screen memos pages and MessagesR/F. 128 Image display You can set whether to display images contained in sites, or screen memos. Scroll You can set the number of lines scrolled when pressing H on a display displaying text of sites, screen memos or MessagesR/F. Message list disp. You can set how to display MessageR/F list (the number of lines).
: Images of MessageR/F are displayed regardless of this setting. Certificates C]
(i-mode) ]83 You can set a certificate used for displaying SSL-enabled sites. 1. From the i-mode menu (P119), i-mode setting ]
Certificates ] M [Menu] ] Select from the following setting items Certificate info You can view the selected certificate. Valid/Invalid You can set whether to validate or invalidate the selected certificate. You can check the status of a certificate by the following symbols.
: Valid
: Invalid Information If Valid/Invalid is set to Invalid, you cannot display the sites with that certificate. Others C]
(i-mode) ]84 You can set i-mode connection timeout and the type of message to check. You can also check the i-mode settings. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P235 1. From i-mode menu (P119), i-mode setting ]
Others ] Select from the following setting items Connection timeout It may take time to download from some sites. You can set the time to wait before canceling downloading. After setting, press I[Done]. i-motion auto play You can set whether to play back an i-motion movie automatically when you download a standard (normal) type of i-motion movie from a site. After setting, press I[Done]. Check new message You can set the contents to check by performing Check new message from among i-mode mail, MessageR or Message F. After setting, press I [Done]. i-mode Check settings You can check the individual i-mode setting. Reset settings You can reset each of the i-mode setting to their defaults. To reset the settings, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. Reset data You can delete all data related to i-mode (Bookmark, Screen memo, URL history) except for MessageR/F. To reset the data, enter terminal security code > C
[OK]. Information Even when you have set Connection Timeout to Unlimited, you may be disconnected depending on radio wave conditions. i
m o d e 129 i-mode Displaying Sites You can connect to sites by easy key operation, and use various types of services offered by IPs (Information Service Providers). (For some sites, you may be required to apply to the IPs separately.) 1. From the i-mode menu (P119), iMenu blinks during i-mode communication. 2. Select an item (link) ] C i
m o d e
<Site>
FE: You can scroll the menu. P: You can end i-mode. Information If there is a number in front of the item showing the link, you can connect to that link directly by pressing the same number on the keypad. Note that some sites cannot be connected. Depending on the site, images may not be displayed. 130 Depending on the site connected, the confirmation screen may appear stating that mobile phone information is sent. Your mobile phone information (the model and the serial number of your mobile phone) is sent to the IP (Information Service Provider) over the Internet, so could be perceived by third parties. The phone number, address or age are not sent to IP (Information Service provider). Using the Submenus of the Site Screen 1. From the Site screen (See left), M[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Add bookmark You can add the displayed URL of the Site to Bookmark. The bookmark screen is displayed, and you can register the site by pressing I [Done]. You can access directly to the site from the registered bookmark. > P121 Add screen memo You can save a displayed web page as a screen memo. You can display saved screen memos without connecting to i-mode. > P122 Save graphics 1 You can select and save an image contained in a web page. > P134 Show properties URL : You can check the URL of the displayed site. Page properties : You can check information on the displayed web page. Certificates 2 : You can check the certificate used in the displayed site. Bookmark list You can view a list of bookmarks registered by Add bookmark. If you select a bookmark, you can directly access the site. Go to location Input address : You can access web pages supporting i-mode by entering URL. After entering it, press I [Done] to connect to the site. URL history : You can select the URL history of a displayed site to directly access the web page. Screen memo list You can view a list of pages saved as Screen Memo. You can display the saved page by selecting it. Menu You can bring up the iMenu display. Home You can display the web page registered as Home
(P128). Reload You can reload data of a site. The contents of the site will change to the latest information each time you reload if the site has been updated. Compose message You can send the URL of site being displayed or the URL for link with them attaching to the message text. Go to step 2 on page 149 of Composing message. i-mode Change char. code When characters are not displayed correctly, you can convert them to the correct ones. Add to phonebook 3 You can add the phone number and mail address displayed on the web page to the phonebook. Go to step 2 on page 64 of Adding to phonebook. Retry 4 You can play back a GIF animation from the beginning. 1: You cannot activate this menu in case the image that can be saved is not included in a site or Image is set not to display.
(P128) 2: If no certificate is used in the site, you cannot use this menu. 3: Activate this menu after selecting the phone number or mail address to register. Otherwise, you cannot activate this menu. 4: You cannot activate this menu when GIF animation is not included in displayed site. i
m o d e 131 i-mode Information Some sites may not be saved as bookmarks. When characters are not displayed correctly even after Change char. code, repeat the operation. However, even if you repeat this operation, the correct characters may not come up. The original characters are displayed if you repeat the operation 4 times. If you perform Change char. code when the correct characters are displayed, wrong characters may come up instead. i
m o d e SSL Pages SSL pages use data encryption for data transmission to prevent hacking and source-file overwriting so that you can more safely exchange personal information. If you try to display an SSL-enabled page, the SSL communication starting message appears. When an SSL page is displayed, appears. When moving from an SSL page to an ordinary page, the confirmation display appears. After Yes is selected, a regular page is displayed and disappears. 132 How to See/Use Sites Entering/Selecting Information on Sites When you use a site, you may enter characters (text box) or select an item from multiple options (radio button, checkbox, pull down menu). Display Example Name Description
Radio button Unselected
Selected Used for item selection. You can select only 1 item.
Checkbox Unselected
Selected Used for item selection. You can select multiple items. ID Text box You can enter characters. Password Tokyo Saitama Kanagawa Pull down menu Used for item selection. If you select a pull down menu, a list of selectable items is displayed. Returning to Obtained Previous Page/Going to Obtained Next Page The FOMA phone stores the last few screens displayed. 1. To display the previous page, L To display the next page, R Operations from Highlighted Information You can easily make calls, send mails, and display Internet web pages using highlighted information (phone numbers, mail addresses, URLs, and so on) displayed on sites and in mail and MessageR/F. Phone To function/AV Phone To function You can make a call by selecting displayed information such as a phone number. You may not be able to use the Phone To/AV Phone To function depending on the site. 1. Select information such as a phone number ] C 2. Voice call/Video-phone call You can make a call after setting the Caller ID notification according to the screen. i-mode Information You can add phone number information displayed on a web page to the phonebook using the submenu of the site screen. Mail To function You can send mails by selecting displayed information such as a mail address. You may not be able to use the Mail To function depending on the site. 1. Select information such as a mail address ] C Go to step 2 of Composing i-mode mail (P149). Information You can add mail address information displayed on a web page to the phonebook using the submenu of the site screen. Web To function You can access a web page by selecting displayed information such as a URL. You may not be able to use the Web To function depending on the site. 1. Select information such as URL ] Press C If the confirmation screen to connect appears, press I [Yes]. i
m o d e Next page 133 i-mode i-appli To function You can start i-appli by selecting the displayed URL (link). 1. Select i-appli information ] C ] I [Yes]
Information If i-appli To (P162) is set to OFF, you cannot start i-appli by this operation. Downloading Images from Sites You can set images saved from the displayed web page or screen memos. You can check the saved images in My picture of Data box > i-mode folder. > P166 1. Displaying Site / Saved Page screen ] M [Menu]
] Save graphics ] C ] Select an image ] C
] Yes i
m o d e Information Some images may not be saved. You cannot select Save graphics if the image that can be saved is not included or Image (P128) is set not to be saved. Downloading i-melody from Sites You can download a melody from a site and set it. Download a melody from a site. A saved melody can be checked by Melody of Data box > i-mode folder
(P176). 1. Display a site that supports downloading of melodies ] Select a melody ] C After the download is completed, the confirmation screen appears. 2. Video content menu Play: You can play the downloaded melody. File Protection: You can view the information of i-motion downloaded from network. Back: You can return to the site without saving the melody. Information Depending on the site, you may not be able to download melodies. Some downloaded melodies may not be played back successfully. 134 Obtaining i-motion Movies from Sites The i-motion movie is a moving image file containing images and sound. Acquired i-motion can be checked by i-motion of Data box > i-mode folder (P173). See Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] for details. 1. Select an i-motion movie on a site that supports downloading of i-motion movies ] C When downloading is done, the confirmation screen appears. 2. Video content menu Play: You can play i-motion downloaded from network. File property: You can view the information of i-motion downloaded from network. Back: You can return to the site without saving i-motion. Information You can change the playback methods for while downloading i-motion movies. > P129 Some downloaded i-motion movies might not be played back correctly. You cannot download i-motion movies of the streaming type and the ASF format. i-mode Using My Menu If you register frequently-used sites in My Menu, you can access them easily. Registering Sites in My Menu 1. Bring up the page of the site to be registered ] Select Register My Menu ] C 2. Select the i-mode password text box ] C ] Enter the i-mode password ] C ] Select For i-mode password, see Changing i-mode Password. Information Some sites may not be registered in My Menu. If you subscribe to Menu/Search in a pay site, it will be registered in My Menu automatically. Displaying Sites from My Menu 1. From the Stand-by display, I [i-mode] ] iMenu
] My Menu ] Select a site to access ] C i
m o d e 135 i-mode Changing i-mode Password The i-mode password (4 digits) is required to subscribe to and unsubscribe from message services and i-mode pay sites, and to perform i-mode mail settings. At purchase, this password is set to 0000 (4 zeros), so you need to change it to your own i-mode password. Be sure not to let others know your i-mode password. 1.On the Stand-by display, I [i-mode] ] iMenu ]
English ] Options ] Change i-mode Password 2. Select the Current Password text box ] C ]
Enter your i-mode password (4 digits) ] C At purchase, the setting is 0000, so enter 0000 for the first time. 3. Select the New Password text box ] C ] Enter a new i-mode password (4 digits) ] C 4. Select the New Password (Confirmation) text box
] C ] Enter a new i-mode password (4 digits) ]
C ] Select Enter the same number as you entered in step 3. Information If you forget your i-mode password, you can have it reset to 0000 at a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. You will be required to show your official identification (drivers license, etc.). i
m o d e 136 Mail Menu .............................................138 i-mode Mail...........................................138 Displaying Mail in Inbox.......................139 Displaying Mail in Outbox....................144 Displaying Mail in Unsent message ....147 Composing Mail ...................................149 Checking New i-mode mail and Message ...............................................154 Receiving Selected Mail ......................154 Checking whether Center Holds SMS....155 Changing Mail Setting..........................155 Mail Inbox Mail Select Select To display the Mail menu On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(Mail) or Mail 137 See Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] for more details. This model does not support all the services described in Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]. Check which models support which services in Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]. SMS messages (short messages) You can send and receive SMS messages between FOMA phones without subscribing to i-mode. Sending and receiving SMS messages with subscribers to overseas carriers in addition to DoCoMo are also available. For information on the countries and overseas carriers with which SMS messages can be exchanged, see the International Service web page of DoCoMo. Refer to Network Services Users Guide for more details. Mail Mail Menu On the mail menu, the mail functions offered by the FOMA phone are displayed. Menu item Description Inbox Outbox Unsent message Compose mail Check new message Receive option M a i l Check new SMS Mail setting You can check the records and contents of received i-mode mails and SMS messages. You can check the records and contents of sent i-mode mails and SMS messages. You can check the contents of temporarily saved i-mode mails and SMS messages. You can bring up the display to compose i-mode mails and SMS messages. You can receive i-mode mails held at the i-
mode Center. You can check the subjects of i-mode mail held at the i-mode Center and select mail to receive, or delete mail at the Center before receiving it. You can receive SMS messages by checking the SMS Center. You can change the settings of each mail function of the FOMA phone. i-mode Mail The i-mode phone has the mail functions for exchanging e-
mail (electronic mail) via the Internet. You need to subscribe to i-mode to use i-mode mail. 138 Displaying Mail in Inbox 3. Select mail ] C Mail C]
(Mail) ]1 The inbox folder list is displayed. You can sort mails by folder. You can check the records and contents of received i-mode mails and SMS messages. 1. From the Mail menu (P137), Inbox Folder Inbox (1) 1/1 The number of unread mails Menu Select
<Received Mail Folder List>
2. Select a folder ] C The time to receive the mail1 Sender2 Subject3
1:
The mail you receive is displayed on a time basis that day. From the next day on, each message is displayed by the date when you received it. The name is displayed when the entry is saved in phonebook. SMS is displayed as SMS
2:
3:
J/FE: You can view previous or after pages for multiple pages.
<Received Mail Display>
I[Reply]: You can reply the receiver. Go to step 3 on page 149 of Composing i-mode mail / step 3 of page 152 Composing SMS. J: You can view previous or next mail. FE: You can scroll the screen. Information To delete all displayed the contents in box setting Security
(P156), enter terminal security code > C [OK]. The deco mail via FOMA phone includes of text and URL. If you select the URL, you can read deco mail. > P144 You can save up to 400 received mails/SMS. Depending on the size of mails/SMS messages, the number of mails/SMS messages to save may be fewer. M a i l Next Page 139 Mail Icons on the Received Mail Folder List Screen Icon Description Mail with a file to which the UIM restrictions are set attached Subject Mail received as To-type Mail received as Cc-type Mail received as Bcc-type To-type broadcast mail address Cc-type broadcast mail address Received date and time A melody is pasted. i-appli launch information is pasted. A melody is attached. An image of up to 10,000 bytes is attached. A URL of i-shot is attached. A URL or i-motion file is attached. A pasted melody is damaged. An attached file is damaged.
: Appears only on the Received Mail Display Screen. Icon
(gray)
(gray)
(blue)
(blue) Description Folder without unread mails/SMS messages Folder with unread mails/SMS messages Created folder without unread mails/SMS messages Created folder with unread mails/SMS messages Received Mail List and Marks on Display Screen Icon Description Unread mail messages Read mail messages Unread SMS messages Read SMS messages Unread SMS reports Read SMS reports Unread SMS messages in the UIM Read SMS messages in the UIM Protected mails Forwarded mails Replied mails/SMS messages Mail with a file attached or pasted M a i l 140 Using the Submenu of the Received Mail Folder List Display 1. On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P139), M
[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Create folder You can add a folder. Rename folder You can edit the name of the selected folder. Delete folder You can delete the selected folder. You cannot delete a folder if a mail is saved. Auto sort You can set sort conditions to the selected folder. Go to step 2 of Distributing the received mail to the folder automatically (P143).
: These operations are not available when you select Inbox. Using the Submenu of the Received Mail List Screen Setting item/Setting at purchase > P256 1. On the Received Mail List screen (P139), M [Menu] ]
Select from the following submenu items Move to folder 1 You can move the selected mails and messages to other added folders. Mail Delete You can delete the selected mails and messages. Delete selected You can select and delete multiple mails and messages. After selecting mail messages, M [Menu] > Select Delete. Delete all You can delete all mail messages in the folder. To delete all, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. Protect ON/OFF 1 You can set or cancel the protection of the selected mails and messages. Protected mail cannot be moved/deleted. Sort You can sort the mails and messages displayed on the List display. Filter You can change the type of the mails and messages displayed on the List display. UIM 2 You can move and copy the selected SMS messages in the FOMA phone to the UIM, and move and copy the SMS messages in the UIM to the FOMA phone. 1: You cannot use this menu for SMS in the UIM. 2: You cannot use this menu for protected SMS or SMS delivery report. M a i l Next Page 141 Mail Using the Submenu of the Received Mail Display Screen 1. On the Received Mail List screen (P139), M [Menu]
] Select from the following submenu items Reply You can reply after selecting the method to reply. Go to step 3 on page 149 of Composing i-mode mail/ step 3 on page 152 of Composing SMS. Reply 1: You can reply to the sender of i-mode mail from the detailed received mail list. Reply quoted 1: You can send the reply quoting the original text in your received i-mode mail. Reply all 1: You can reply all receivers and senders at the same time. Reply quoted all 1: You can reply all receivers and senders with quoting the original text in your received i-mode mail. Forward You can forward the displayed mail to other party. Go to step 2 (P149) of Composing i-mode mail or step 2 (P152) of Composing SMS messages. Move to folder 2 You can move the displayed mail to other added folders. Delete You can delete the displayed mail. Protect ON/OFF 2 You can set or cancel the protection to the displayed mail. The protected mail messages cannot be moved/deleted. M a i l 142 Store Address You can register mail address / phone number of receiver on displaying the mail. Go to step 2 on page 64 of Adding to Phonebook. Add to phonebook 3 You can add the mail address / phone number written on the displayed mail text to the phonebook. Go to step 2 of Adding to Phonebook (P64). Save attach file 4 You can save an image (
to 10,000 bytes attached to the displayed mail. You can check the saved images by selecting Data box.
> My picture. > i-mode folder. > P166, P176 Copy For copying after selecting the following items, see
) and a melody (
) of up Copying/Cutting/Pasting (P219). Body: You can copy the text. Subject 1: You can copy the title. Sender: You can copy e-mail address / phone number of the sender. UIM 5 You can move / copy the displayed SMS message in the FOMA phone to the UIM, and move / copy the SMS messages in the UIM to the FOMA phone. 1: This menu is not displayed for SMS. 2: You cannot use this menu for SMS of UIM. 3: Activate this menu after selecting mail address / phone number to register. If nothing to be registered is included, you cannot activate this function. 4: Activate this menu after selecting the file to save. If the file to register does not exist, you cannot activate this function. 5: You cannot activate this function for i-mode mail or protected SMS. Information The Submenu items for the SMS report / voice mail incoming notification display screen are Move to folder, Delete, and Protect ON/OFF only. Distributing the received mail to the folder automatically The mails / SMS messages is applicable for the condition can be saved to the folder automatically. You can set this only to additional folder. 1. On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P139), select a folder to specify conditions ] M [Menu]
] Auto Sort The screen for automatic sort is displayed. 2. M [Menu] ] Select submenu. 2 Address 1 You can enter e-mail address or phone number to distribute each folder. Open phonebook: You can enter the phone number searching from phonebook. Input address: You can directly enter the address. When you enter e-mail address, you input correctly to a domain (the part of after @ mark). Mail 2 Subject 1 You can input the subject of mail to distribute a folder. Release You can cancel one of conditions of distribution of folder. Release all You can cancel all distribution conditions of folders. 1 : When a received mail contains multiple conditions, it is distributed to the top folder of the folder list that corresponding condition is set. 2 : You cannot set the multiple conditions in the same folder. Receiving i-mode Mail/SMS Messages Automatically When the FOMA phone is in the service area, it automatically receives i-mode mail/ SMS messages. 1. A mail or an SMS message is received
(White) is displayed.
(White) or 2. The result of the reception is displayed If you want to check the received i-mode mail message immediately, select i-mode mail, and press C. If you want to check the received SMS message immediately, press C Q: Go to previous screen. M a i l 143 Mail Saving Images over 10,000 bytes A JPEG image over 10,000 bytes is not downloaded properly to the FOMA handset. Therefore, you can save it after extracting the data from URL for image view in mail text, and connecting i-shot center. 1. On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P139), select URL ] C ] Yes For the method of saving images, see Obtaining Images from Sites (P134). Information You can view the contents of received Deco-mails in this way. M a i l Downloading i-motion Movies from i-motion Mail Data of i-motion mail is not downloaded to the FOMA phone even when it is received. You need to access the i-motion mail Center from its URL given to the mail text to see an i-
motion movie to download and save the data. The saved i-
motion can be checked in i-motion of Data box >
i-mode folder (P173). 1. From the Received Mail Folder List screen (P139), select the URL ] C ] I Yes Downloading of i-motion starts. The i-motion is played while being downloaded in the case it is possible. 144 2. After downloading, press Q Play: You can play downloaded i-motion. File property: You can view information of downloaded i-motion from a site. Back: The site will be returned, not saving i-motion. Displaying Mail in Outbox C]
(Mail) ]2 The Sent Mail List is displayed. You can check the records and contents of sent i-mode mail and SMS messages. 1. From the Mail menu (P137), select Outbox. The time to send the mail1 Receiver2 Subject3
1:
2:
3:
The mail you receive is displayed on a time basis that day. From the next day on, each message is displayed by the date when you received it. The name is displayed when the entry is saved in phonebook. SMS is displayed as SMS
<Outbox>
K/FE: Display the previous or next page for multiple pages. 2. Select a mail ] C Icon Description Mail Receiver The time to send the mail Subject
<Sent Mail Display>
J: Display the previous or next page. FE: Scroll by screen. Information To display the box which is set Security (P156), enter terminal security code > C [OK]. You can save up to 400 mails / SMS. Depending on the size of mails / SMS messages, the number of mails / SMS messages that can be saved may be smaller. Icons on the Sent Mail List display and the Sent Mail display screen Icon Description Mail successfully sent Mail failed to be sent SMS message successfully sent SMS message failed to be sent Sent SMS messages in the UIM Protected mail / SMS messages Mail with a file attached Mail with an attached file to which UIM restrictions are set Subject Mail address successfully sent as To-type mail Mail address failed to be sent as To-type mail Mail address successfully sent as Cc-type mail Mail address failed to be sent as Cc-type mail Mail address successfully sent as Bcc-type mail Mail address failed to be sent as Bcc-type mail Sent date and time A pasted melody file is attached. An i-appli activation information file is attached. A melody is attached. An image of up to 10,000 bytes is attached. An image (JPEG) of over 10,000 bytes is attached. Moving images are attached. A corrupted melody file is attached. A corrupted file is attached. M a i l
: Appears only on the Sent Mail Display Screen. 145 Mail Using the Submenu of the Sent Mail List Screen Setting item/Setting at purchase > P256 1. From the Sent Mail Folder List screen (P144), M
[Menu] ] Select from the following Submenu items Edit You can edit the selected mail again. See Composing i-mode mail (P149) / Composing SMS messages
(P152). Delete You can delete the selected mail. Delete selected You can select and delete multiple mail messages. After selecting mail messages, M [Menu] > Select Delete. Delete all You can delete all mail messages in the Sent box. To delete all, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. Protect ON/OFF 1 You can set or cancel the protection to the selected mail. Protected mail cannot be deleted. Sort You can sort the mail messages displayed in the list screen. Filter You can change the type of the mail messages displayed in the list screen. M a i l 146 UIM 2 You can move and copy the selected SMS message in the FOMA phone to the UIM, and move and copy the SMS messages in the UIM to the FOMA phone. 1 : You cannot use this menu for SMS in the UIM. 2 : You cannot use this menu for i-mode mail or SMS delivery report. Using the Submenu of the Sent Mail Display Screen 1. From the Sent Mail Display screen (P145), M
[Menu] ] Select from the following Submenu items Edit You can edit the displayed mail again. Go to step 2 in Composing i-mode mail (P149) /Composing SMS messages (P152). Delete You can delete the displayed mail. Protect ON/OFF 1 You can set or cancel the protection to the displayed mail. The protected mail messages cannot be deleted. Store address You can register mail address/phone number of receiver on displaying the mail. Go to step 2 on page 64 of Adding to Phonebook. Add to phonebook 2 You can add the mail address and phone number of the sender of the displayed mail to the phonebook. Go to step 2 (P64) of Adding to Phone Book. Copy 3 For copying after selecting the item, see Copying /
Cutting / Pasting (P219). Body: You can copy the text. Subject: You can copy the subject. UIM 4 You can move and copy the displayed SMS message to the UIM, and move and copy the SMS messages in the UIM to the FOMA phone. 1: This function is not available in SMS of UIM. 2: After selecting the mail address / phone number, you can activate the function. If nothing that can be registered is included, you cannot activate the menu properly. 3: This function is not available for SMS. Mail The time to save1 Receiver2 Subject3
1:
The mail you save is displayed on a time basis that day. From the next day on, each message is displayed by the date when you saved it. The name is displayed when the entry is saved in phonebook. SMS is displayed as SMS
<Unsent message List>
2:
3:
M a i l 147 Information To display the box which is set Security (P156), enter terminal security code > C [OK]. You can save up to 400 mails / SMS. Depending on the size of mail/ SMS, the number of mails / SMS messages that can be saved may be smaller. Mail Icons on the Unsent Mail List display and the Unsent Mail display screen Icon Description Unsent mail Unsent SMS message Mail with a file attached Mail with an attached file to which UIM restrictions are set Subject Address of To-type Address of Cc-type Address of Bcc-type Attached file A pasted melody file is attached. i-appli launch information is attached. A melody file is attached. An image file of up to 10,000 bytes is attached. An image (JPEG) of over 10,000 bytes is attached. A moving image file is attached. A damaged melody file is attached. A damaged file is attached. Text
: Only appears on the Unsent Mail display screen. M a i l 148 Using the Submenu of the Unsent Message List Screen Setting item/Setting at purchase > P257 1. From the Unsent Message List screen (P147), M
[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Send You can send the selected mails and messages. Delete You can delete the selected mails and messages. Delete selected You can select and delete multiple mail mails and messages. After selecting mail messages, M [Menu]
> Select Delete. Delete all You can delete all mail messages in the folder. To delete all, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. Sort You can sort the mail messages displayed in the list display. Filter You can change the type of the mail messages displayed on the list display. Using the Submenu of the Unsent Mail Display Screen From the Unsent Mail display screen (P147), press M
[Menu] and select a submenu item. See Using the Submenu of the Compose mail display (P150) / Using the Submenu of the Compose SMS Screen (P153) for the available submenu items. Composing Mail Composing i-mode Mail C]
(Mail) ]41 You can create and send new i-mode mail. 1. From the Mail menu (P137), select Compose mail
] Compose message
<Compose message Display>
Mail 2. Select the Address field ] C ] Enter Address ] Enter the address ] Enter Address
] C For a menu displayed for destinations, see Address menu (P150) of Using the Submenu of the Compose Mail Display. 3. Select the Subject field ] C ] Enter the subject ] C In case of not attaching the file, go to step 5. 4. Select (Attach file) field ] C ] Add attached file Select the file saved in My picture / i-motion
(P166) / Melody (P173) of Data box (P176) /
Melody. For a menu displayed for attachment files, see Attach file menu (P150) of Using the Submenu of the Compose Mail Display. If a file is attached, it can be displayed/played by pressing I. 5. Select the Message field ] C ] Enter message ] C 6. I [Send]
M a i l Next Page 149 Mail Information Depending on the radio wave conditions, the characters may not be sent successfully to the destination. Half-pitch katakana or pictographs may not be displayed properly when exchanging mails between i-mode phones. When you enter the destination of the phonebook that a secret code is set, the secret code is automatically added. However, the secret code does not remain on the destination of the sent mail. Using the Submenu of the Compose Mail Display 1. From the Compose Mail display (P149), M [Menu] ]
Select from the following Submenu items Send You can send the i-mode mail that you are composing or editing. Save You can save the i-mode mail that you are composing or editing in unsent message. Add address You can add addresses. When you add addresses, you can send same i-mode mail to multiple recipients at the same time. You can send same mail to up to 5 addresses at a time. Open phonebook: You can add the address by searching the phonebook. M a i l 150 Input address: You can enter the address directly. Received list: Set an address selected from received mail history. Sent list: Set an address selected from sent mail history. Address menu 1 Open phonebook: You can add the address by searching the phonebook. Input address: You can enter the address directly. Change to To: You can change the setting of receiver to To type. Change to Cc: You can change the setting of receiver to Cc type. Change to Bcc: You can change the setting of receiver to Bcc type. Delete address: You can delete the address. Received list: Set an address selected from received mail history. Sent list: Set an address selected from sent mail history. Attach file menu Attach file: You can select the file in My picture
(P166) / i-motion (P173) / Melody (P176) of Data box. Take a picture 3: A Still Image Finder Stand-by screen appears. > P110 Press C [Attach] on Still Image Shooting End display to add to the attachment file. Take a movie 4: A Moving Image Finder Stand-by screen appears. > P115 Press C [OK] on Moving Image Shooting End display to add to the attachment file. Delete att. file 2: You can delete the attachment file. Play/ Display file 2: You can play or view the file. Add signature You can insert a signature at the end of the text of mail. You need to register the signature beforehand.
> p156 Delete body You can delete the the text of mail that you are composing or editing. Delete mail You can delete the mail under composing or editing. 1 : After selecting 2 : After selecting 3 : Unavailable when a shot still image exceeding 5,000 bytes is
, you can operate the menu.
, you can operate the menu.
already attached to an attachment file. 4 : Unavailable when a moving image/i-motion or JPEG image exceeding 10,000 bytes is already attached to an attachment file. Information The type or receiver To: Ordinary receiver Cc: To inform the contents in addition to the receiver. Bcc: To inform the contents if you do not want other receivers to know except for direct receiver. Mail About attachable files Type of file Melody Image of 10,000 bytes or less (JPEG, GIF) Image over 10,000 bytes (JPEG) Moving image/ i-motion movie Maximum number of files Up to 10 files 1 1 file 2 1 : Up to 10 files when the total size of a data file including melodies, images and the text is equivalent to 5,000 full-
pitch characters (i.e., 10,000 bytes). 2 : You can attach either an image or moving image/
i-motion movie of up to 100K bytes. You can attach the file separately from melody files and images of 10,000 bytes or less. You cannot attach files that are prohibited from being attached to mail or output from the FOMA phone to other devices. When a JPEG image or an i-motion movie in excess of 10,000 bytes is attached, the number of characters you can enter in the text field decreases by the equivalent of 100 full-pitch (200 half-pitch) characters. The i-mode phone of the mova service cannot receive GIF images and melodies. Some attached files may be deleted at the i-mode Center or not be received, displayed, or played properly by the recipients. M a i l 151 Mail Using the Submenu of the Creating next Entry Screen From creating next Entry screen, press M [Menu] and select a Submenu item. See Using the Submenu of Character Entry display (P218) for the available Submenu items. Composing SMS messages C]
(Mail) ]42 You can create and send SMS messages. You can send and receive SMS messages to and from the subscribers to overseas carriers in addition to DoCoMo. For information on the countries and overseas carriers with which SMS messages can be exchanged, see the International Service web page of DoCoMo. 1. From the Mail menu (P137), select Compose mail M a i l
] Compose SMS Compose SMS Menu Select Send
<Compose SMS Display>
152 2. Select the Address field ] C ] Enter Address ] Enter the recipients phone number ]
C For a menu displayed for destinations, see Address menu (P153) of Using the Submenu of the Compose SMS Display. 3. Select the Message field ] C ] Enter the message ] C 4. I [Send]
If the recipient is a subscriber to an overseas carrier other than DoCoMo:
+ (Press key 2 times) ] Country code ]
Mobile phone number of the recipient or 010 ] Country code ] Mobile phone number of the recipient If the mobile phone number starts with 0, enter the number by omitting 0. Information Depending on the radio wave conditions, the characters may not be sent successfully to the destination. When you send an SMS message to a subscriber to an overseas carrier, if characters that the other party does not support are included in its text, they may not be displayed correctly. If the receiver has an i-mode phone of mova service, it may receive SMS from FOMA phone as i-mode mail. If the sender does not notify caller ID (including public phone/Unknown ID), you cannot answer to the SMS message. Using the Submenu of the Compose SMS Display 1. From the Compose SMS display (P152), M [Menu]
] Select from the following Submenu items Send You can send an SMS message that you are composing or editing. Save You can save an SMS message that you are composing or editing in Draft box. Address menu Open phonebook: You can add the address by searching the phonebook. Input address: You can enter the address directly. Received list: Set an address selected from received mail history. Sent list: Set an address selected from sent mail history. SMS report request You can set whether to request a report for the SMS message that you are composing. An SMS report is an SMS message to notify you when your SMS message reaches the recipient. Mail SMS validity term You can set the period during which the SMS Center holds the SMS message that you are composing or editing when the recipient cannot receive it immediately. Delete body You can delete whole sentences entered in the text. The phone number of receiver will not be deleted. Delete SMS You can delete the SMS message that you are composing or editing. Using the Submenu of of the Character Entering Display while Composing SMS From the Compose SMS display, press M [Menu] and select a submenu item. See Using the Submenu of the Character Entry display (P218) for the available Submenu items. M a i l 153 Receiving Selected Mail C]
(Mail) ]6 You can check the subject of i-mode mail held at the i-mode Center and select mails to receive, or delete mails at the Center before receiving them. To use this function, you need to set Receive option
(P155) to ON beforehand. Note that, when this is ON, i-mode mail cannot be received automatically. 1. From the Mail menu (P137), Receive option The phone is connected to the Center, and the display for selecting mail to receive is displayed. 2. Select the pull-down menu for each mail ] C ]
Select Receive, Delete or Hold ] C 3. Select Receive/Delete ] C The confirmation screen appears. 4. Select OK ] C In step 2, the mail for which Receive was selected are received immediately. Mail Checking New i-mode mail and Message
(Mail) ]5 When your FOMA phone has been turned off or out of the service area, you can check whether or not the i-mode Center holds i-mode mail and messageR/F. 1. From the Stand-by screen, press M for 2 or more C]
seconds The Check results display appears. To read the received i-mode mail immediately, select Mail and press C. Information M a i l When the i-mode Center holds i-mode mail and messageR/F, the relevant icon (P31) is displayed. When mail or messages arrive at the Center when, for instance, your FOMA phone is turned off, the icon may not be displayed. When Receive option is set to ON, you will receive all mail held at the Center if you use Check new message. If you do not want to receive all mail, unmark Mail from the Check new message (P155) beforehand. 154 Checking whether Center Holds SMS C]
(Mail) ]7 When your FOMA phone has been turned off or out of the service area, you can check whether or not the SMS Center holds SMS messages. 1. From the Mail menu (P137), Check new SMS The Check results display appears. To read the received SMS messages immediately, press C. Changing Mail Setting Communication C]
(Mail) ]81 You can make settings related to communication of mail and SMS messages. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P239 1. From the Mail menu (P137), Mail setting ]
Communication ] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I [Done]
Receive opt. setting You can set whether to select i-mode mail to receive. If this function is set to ON, you cannot receive i-mode mail automatically. Mail Receive attach file You can set whether to receive images or melodies attached to i-mode mail. Check new message When you receive messages by performing Check New Message, you can select an item to check from i-mode mail, messageR/F. SMS report request You can set whether to request a report for the SMS message that you are composing. An SMS report is an SMS message to notify you when your SMS message reaches the recipient. SMS validity term You can set the period during which the SMS Center keeps the SMS message that you are composing or editing when the recipient cannot receive it immediately. M a i l Information The attachment file set to by Receive attach file cannot be received as the file is deleted at i-mode center. You can receive the melody of MFi format attached to the body of mail even if you set the Melody to attach file. by Receive 155 1. From the Mail menu (P137), Mail setting ]
View ] Select from the following setting items ]
After setting, I [Done]
Character size You can set the character size of the text on the Mail display screen. Scroll You can set the number of lines to scroll when pressing H on the Mail display screen. Mail list display You can set the display method (the number of lines/the contents displayed) on the mail list display. Folder security You can set security to Inbox, Outbox, and Unsent messages in the Mail menu. To display the messages in the box with security set, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. Melody auto play You can set whether to automatically play a melody attached or pasted on the mail display screen. Mail Edit C]
(Mail) ]82 You can make settings related to a signature to be attached to the mail text and quotation mark for when replying to mail. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P239 1. From the Mail menu (P137), Mail setting ] Edit
] Select from the following setting items ] After setting, I [Done]
Edit signature You can set whether to automatically attach your name and address (signature) at the end of the text and can set the contents of the signature. Edit quotation You can set symbols or sentences to be attached to the head of the original text (quotation mark) for Reply quoted. M a i l View C]
(Mail) ]83 You can make the settings related to the display of mail and SMS messages. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P239 156 Others C]
(Mail) ]84 You can check the settings made in Mail setting and reset the settings to the default. 1. From the Mail menu (P137), Mail setting ]
Others ] Select from the following setting items. Check settings You can check the settings made in the Mail settings. Reset settings You can reset the settings made in the Mail settings to the default. To reset settings, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. Reset data You can delete all mail messages and MessageR/F stored in the FOMA phone. To reset the datal, enter terminal security code > C [OK]. Mail M a i l 157 i-appli Software list 1/1 i-appli Select Menu Select What is i-appli.......................................160 Downloading i-appli from Sites ...........160 Starting i-appli......................................161 To display the Software List On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(i-appli) or i-appli 159 3. Yes/No Yes: Activates i-appli. No: Returns to the Site display. Information Downloading is not available at some accessed sites. At downloading software, the confirmation display may appear asking whether to use the serial number of your mobile phone/UIM. Select Yes to start downloading. In this case, the serial number of your mobile phone/UIM is sent to the IP
(Information Service Provider) over the Internet, so could be perceived by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age and gender are not notified to the IP (Information Service Provider) or others by this operation. i-appli What is i-appli By downloading various software programs from sites and saving them into the FOMA phone, you can automatically update the stock prices, weather information, etc. and enjoy games even without connecting to the network. Refer to Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] for details. This model does not support all the services described in Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]. Check which models support which services described in Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]. Downloading i-appli from Sites Download software from sites and start the FOMA phone. 1. Display a site that supports downloading of i-appli
] Select an item that enables you to download the software ] C 2. After the download is finished, C i
a p p l i After the download is finished, the communication setup display may appear. After setting, press I
[Done]. Some software may start immediately after it is downloaded. In this case, the software may not have been saved. When ending the software, the confirmation display may appear asking whether to save it. Select Yes to save it. 160 Starting i-appli Information C]
(i-appli) Some software continues communication after downloaded. You can let it not communicate by Communication setting. i-appli 1. Press I [i-mode] for 1 or more seconds from on Stand-by display.
<Software List>
2. Select the software to be launched ] C P: End the activation of i-appli. Icons on the Software List Icon
(Blue) Description The folder you created Normal i-appli i-appli downloaded from SSL site i-appli that Auto start is set Each icon will be displayed thinly when downloading by other UIM or upgraded of i-appli (Restriction on UIM). Using the Submenu of the Software List Setting item/Setting at purchase > P257 Some submenus are not available depending on the software. 1. From the Software List (See left), M [Menu] ]
Select from the following Submenu items Create folder You can create a folder. Delete folder You can delete a selected holder. You cannot delete a folder in which software is saved. Rename folder You can edit the name of the selected holder. Move to folder You can move a selected software to another folder you created. Upgrade You can upgrade the version of the selected software. Delete You can delete the selected software. Delete selected You can select and delete multiple software. After selecting, M [Menu] > Select Delete. i
a p p l i Next Page 161 i-appli Delete all You can delete all softwares in i-appli. To delete all, C > Enter terminal security code > C [Done]. Sort You can sort software. Properties You can check the name, size, etc. of the selected software. Certificate You can check the owner, issuer, expiration date, etc. of the certificate used for the selected software. Network setting You can set whether to communicate while the selected software is being started. After setting, press I [Done]. i-appli To You can set whether to start the software selected from a site or mail. After setting, press I [Done]. Icon info setting You can set whether icon information for i-mode mail, SMS, messageR/F, battery level, Manner Mode, radio wave strength and being out of area is to be used by the software selected. After setting, press I [Done]. Autostart setting You can set to activate the selected software automatically. If you set to Set, select Edit and enter the method for activation and the time. After setting, press I [Done]. Show desc setting You can set whether to display software information at i-appli downloading. After setting, press I [Done]. Autostart failure You can check information when i-appli fails to start automatically. Trace info You can check information when i-appli supporting the trace function has been terminated due to an error. System info You can check system information such as memory usage status of i-appli.
: You cannot use the folder you created. i
a p p l i 162 Information Note that you may not be able to receive timely information if you have set Network Setting to OFF. When you perform Upgrade of the software, the confirmation display may appear asking whether to use the serial number of your FOMA phone / UIM. If you select Yes, version upgrade starts. In this case, your mobile phone number / serial number of UIM is sent to the IP (Information Service Provider) over the Internet, so could be perceived by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age, and gender are not notified to the IP (Information Service Provider) or others by this operation. Since the version up of pre-installed i-appli is free of charge, the confirmation screen asking whether to use the serial number of your FOMA phone / UIM does not appear. If Icon Info set is set to Use, icon information for i-mode mail, SMS, messageR/F, battery level, Manner mode, radio wave strength and being out of area may be sent to the IP
(Information Service Provider) over the Internet just like your mobile phone number / serial number of UIM, so could be perceived by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age, and gender are not notified to the IP
(Information Provider) or others by this operation. i-appli Pre-installed i-appli This game is to remove the blocks when putting the block has a same result after multiplying the serial number.
(Brain teaser by multiplication matrix) 1. From the screen of software list (P161), select I [Quit]: You can end a game.
] C ] Select the following menu Start 1 Starts the game. Stage 1 You can select the stage (01~10) by pressing J Continue 2 You can resume the game on pause. Key info You can view the information on each button. After displaying, press I [Menu] to return to the menu. Help You can view the information to remove the block. After displaying, when you press J, you can change the screen. Press I [Menu] to return to the menu. Rank You can view the status of score rank. After displaying, you can return to the menu by pressing I [Menu]. i
a p p l i Next page 163 i-appli Sound You can set the sound of game. Each time you press C, you can turn on or off sound. 1 : You cannot see these menus on games on pause. 2 : You can see these menus only on games on pause. Screen on game Indicates next block. If you remove the block, the number will be reduced. If the number is 0, the stage will be clear. Indicates the current stage. If the rest of blocks are cleared, the block will be dropped beside 1 line. Pause M[Pause]/[Resume]: You can pause the game. If you Menu press it again, you can resume it. I[Menu]: Terminate the game and display the menu. i
a p p l i Button on game See Key info (P163) of menu for details. 164 Deleting the block You can delete the falling blocks if you meet the following condition. When the blocks are full from 4th line to 7th line from the left, the game is over.
<Example: Combining the block of number 224>
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
All 3 blocks will be removed.
In case the result after multiplying is 2 digits a, you can paste the block beside same to the last number. See Help (P163), for the block except for number. Game over The screen of game over is displayed. If you press C, you can view the score by displaying rank screen. If you press I[Menu], you can return to the menu. Information When you close the FOMA phone during the game, the game is continued. The game is paused when a call comes in. Introduction of Data box......................166 Displaying/Managing/
Editing Images......................................166 Playing back/Managing/
Moving Images/i-motion......................173 Playing back/Managing/Melody..........176 Data box Data box Data box Select 1 My picture 2 i-motion 3 Melody Select To display the Data box menu On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(Data box) or Data box 165 Data box Introduction of Data box Menu item Folder Data box has the following items and folders:
: Folders added by the user are not included. Menu item Folder Contents Melody Contents Melodies obtained through data transmission, etc. Pre-installed melodies Melodies obtained from sites, etc. Data transfer Pre-installed i-mode Displaying/Managing/Editing Images C]
(Data box) ]1 You can display the shot still images, or still images obtained from sites or i-mode mails. The File Format To Display This FOMA phone supports to display file format as follows. File format Pixel/File size File size Extension name JPEG, GIF Up to 1280 x 1024 dots JPEG file : Up to 700K bytes, GIF file : Up to 500K bytes jpg, gif
: Some files cannot be played depending on the file format. Still images etc. shot camera. Still images obtained through data transmission, etc. Still images usable for frames and elements Pre-installed still images Still images obtained from sites, etc. Moving images shot by video camera etc. Moving images obtained through data transmission, etc. Pre-installed moving images i-motion obtained from sites, etc. My picture Camera Data transfer Item Pre-installed i-mode Camera Data transfer Pre-installed i-mode i-motion D a t a b o x 166 Displaying Images 1. From Data box menu (P165), My picture 3. Select a file ] C My picture [1/5]
Camera 4 file Data transfer 0 File Item 80 Files The number of files in the selected folder Pre-installed Menu Open 0 File Switch I [View by] : You can select the type of listing the folder. Menu Full Mail
<Image>
Data box File name CFull : The image will be displayed in full screen. IMail : You can send i-mode mail with attaching the selected file. Go to step 2 on page 149 of Composing i-mode mail. J : Displays the previous or next file.
<Folder List>
2. Select a folder ] C The mark on the image file list Camera [1/5]
Open Menu Switch
<Image File List>
The name and size of selected file Mark Description I [Mail] : You can compose i-mode mail with attaching the selected file. Go to step 2 on page 149 Composing i-mode mail. Previous list The file set the restriction Unrecognized file
: Output from the FOMA phone is inhibited or file editing is restricted. D a t a b o x 167 Data box Using the Submenu of the Folder List Setting item/Setting at purchase > P258 1. From the Folder List (P167), M [Menu] ] Select from the following Submenu items Open You can open the selected folder. New folder You can create a folder. Delete You can delete the selected folder. Sort by You can sort the folders. Sorting the created folders are applied to only by the Name. View by You can change folder display methods. Memory info. You can check status of the storage area on the FOMA phone, etc. Folder property You can check the name, size and the number of the files in the folder of the selected folder.
: You cannot use this menu in pre-installed folder. D a t a b o x 168 Information If you delete a folder which includes an image set as a wallpaper in stand-by mode, phonebook or the video-phone call, or if you delete a folder which includes a melody set to ringtone, alarm or schedule, each one can be returned to the setting at purchase. Using the Submenu of the Image File List Display Setting item/Setting at purchase > P258 1. From the Image File List screen (P167), select a file
] M [Menu] ] Select from the following Submenu items New folder 1 You can create a folder. Files 1 View : You can display the selected file. Edit 2 4 : You can edit the selected file. > P171 Move 3 : You can move the selected file to other folder. Select the folder C > I [Paste]. Copy 3 : You can copy the selected file to other folder. Select the folder C > I [Paste]. Delete : You can delete the selected file. Delete all : You can delete all the files in the folder. You need to enter your terminal security code for deleting. Rename : You can change the name of the selected file. Data box View by You can change file display methods. Memory info. You can check status of the storage area on the FOMA phone, etc. File property You can check the name, size and type, created time, resolution, file restriction of the selected file. 1: You cannot use this menu in Item or Pre-installed folder. 2: You can use only JPEG file (Except for unrestricted file). 3: You cannot move and copy this menu to Item or Pre-
installed folder. 4: You cannot use this menu for restricted file. Information If you delete the image set in stand-by mode, phonebook, or video-phone, each image returns to the setting at purchase. Mark/Unmark 1 You can move, copy, and delete after selecting multiple files. After selecting, press M [Menu] > File
> Select Move/Copy/Delete Mark : You can select a file at a time. Mark all : You can select all the files collectively. Unmark : You can deselect the file selected by Mark or one of the files selected by Unmark all at a time. Unmark all : You can deselect the file selected by Mark or all the files selected by Unmark all. Send via mail 1 4 You can attach a file to i-mode mail for sending. Go to step 2 (P149) of Compose i-mode mail . Set as wallpaper Select the Main display or Sub display and set as wallpaper for the Stand-by display, etc. Slide show Go : Files in the folder are displayed in order. Settings : You can set the view as and Time interval (secs). After setting, press I [Done]. Make animated GIF 1 You can select up to 10 files to create animation. After selecting the files, press I [Make]. Sort by You can sort files. 4 D a t a b o x 169 Set as wallpaper Select the Main display or Sub display to set as wallpaper for the Stand-by display. Slide show Go : Files in the folder are displayed in order. Settings : You can set the View as and Time interval (secs) for the slide show. After the setting, press I [Done]. Go to list You can return to the list screen. (P167) File property You can check the name, size, type , created time, resolution and file restriction of the selected file. 1: You cannot use this menu in Item or Pre-installed folder. 2: You can use only JPEG file (Except unrestricted file). 3: You cannot use this menu in restricted file. Information If you delete each image which set as a wallpaper in stand-by mode, phonebook, or video-phone call, each one can be returned to the setting at purchase. Data box Using the Submenu of the Image Display Setting items/Setting at purchase > P258 1. From the Image display (P167), M [Menu] ] Select from the following Submenu itemsM Files 1 Delete : You can delete the displayed file. Rename : You can change the name of the displayed file. Edit 2 : You can edit the displayed file. >P171 Send via mail 1 3 You can attach a file to i-mode mail for sending. Go to step 2 of Compose i-mode mail (P149). Full You can bring up an image on the full display hiding the soft keys and display information. J: The previous image/next image is displayed. Q: The full display is cancelled. Zoom Displays an image in a large size. M [+]: Each time you press M, the displayed image is enlarged. I []: The image is displayed in the previous size. K : You can move the display position of the expanded image. Q : The zoom is cancelled. D a t a b o x 170 Editing Still Images You can edit a still image. You can edit only a JPEG file. There are some cases that you may not be able to edit. The edited still image is saved into the folder containing the original still image. Setting items/Setting at purchase > P258 1. From the Image File List (P167) Display (P167), select a file, on the Image Display screen, press M [Menu] ] Files ] Edit The screen to edit the image appears. 2. From the Edit display, M[Menu] ] Select from the following editing methods ] After setting, C [Save] ] New file/Original file ] C After editing in screen, you can operate the function as follow. M[Menu]: Displays the edit menu. I[Undo]: Undoes the edited file. Save You can save the edited still image. Data box Rotate You can rotate a still image 90 degrees to the left or to the right. 1) Left / Right M[Rotate]: You can rotate a still image 90 degrees to the left or to the right. I[Cancel]: You can cancel editing. 2) Press C Resizing You can change the size of a still image. Insert Text : You can paste a text to a still image. If you press M [Menu], you can change the settings of Font size and Font color. 1) Select a text box ] C 2) Enter text ] C M[Text]: You can change the text box. I[Cancel]: Returns to previous menu. 3) C ] Select a position of the text using K ]
C D a t a b o x Next Page 171 Data box Frame : A frame is added to a still image. Select a frame to add. 1) Select a frame ] C M[Rotate]: You can rotate a still image 180 degrees to the left or to the right. I[Cancel]: Returns to previous menu. 2) Press C Element : An element is pasted to a still image. If you press M[Menu] on element selection screen, you can select a size of the element. 1) Select an element ] C 2) Select a position to paste the element by K ]
C If you continue to add same element, repeat step 2. M[More]: You can change to another element. 3) I[Done]
Clipping 1) Select the size for trimming ] C The range for trimming is marked in red line. 2) Select the position for trimming by pressing K
] C If you select User defined size, move the red cursor by pressing K, and set the starting and ending point for trimming by pressing C. Effect Black & White : Makes the color tone black and white. Sepia : Makes the color tone sepia. Negative : Reverses the color tone. Black & White negative : Makes the color tone black and white and reverses the color tone. Color balance : After selecting Red, Green or Blue, adjust the shading by pressing J. Contrast : Emphasizes or weakens contrast. Sharpness : Emphasizes the contour. Softness : Gradates the contour. Mosaic Blur : Applies the mosaic. Select Square
/ Round and move to red line by pressing K, and then set the starting and ending point to apply the mosaic by pressing C. Mirror Reverse the image horizontally. Undo Undoes the edited file. You cannot use this menu for the file before editing. Information You can perform Resizing only to make it smaller than the original still image. You may not be able to change the size depending on the display size of the original image. If a screen proportion of the size selected by Resize is different from the original size of still image, it may be saved by different size from selected one. D a t a b o x 172 Data box In the size of still image is 1280 x 1024, you cannot set Information Insert or Effect. Image sizes that allow Frame setting are 352X288, 320X240, 176X220, 176X144 and 128X96. Frame cannot be set for frames of other sizes. You cannot specify a display size larger than the original still image to Clipping. For the Text box, Frame image or Element at purchase, see Text (P263), Frame (P262) and Element (P263) of Pre-
installed. Playing back/Managing/
Moving Images/i-motion
(Data box) ]2 You can play back moving images shot by the camera, or moving images obtained from sites or i-mode mail. C]
Playable file format FOMA handset can play the file as follow. File format Codec system Extension name MP4 MP4 file (Image: MPEG4, H.263, Voice: AAC, AMR) 3gp You may not be able to play some files depending on file format even if it is compatible with a phone. When more than 3,000 files are stored in one folder, if you try to play a movie stored in this folder, it may not be played properly because of lack of memory. In this case, move the file to another folder and play. Playing back Moving Images / i-motion 1. From the Data box menu (P165), i-motion The number of the files in the selected folder i-motion [1/5]
Camera 5 file Data transfer 0 File Pre-installed 1 Files i-mode Menu Open 0 File Switch
<Folder List>
I [Switch] : You can change the type of display of folder. 2. Select a folder ] C Camera [1/6]
See step 2 Display screen (P167) for the mark on display screen D a t a b o x Voice file The name and size of selected file Open Menu
<Moving image File List>
Switch Next Page 173 Data box I [Mail] : You can send i-mode mail attaching the selected file. Go to step 2 on page 149 of Composing message. 3. Select a file ] C Volume Playback bar Playback elapsed time /
maximum playback time Stereo / monaural Stop Pause Menu
<Moving Image Playback>
C[Plays back]/G[Pauses]:Plays back / Pauses I[Stop]: Stops J: Plays back the previous file / next file J(Press and hold): The images are fast forwarded D a t a b o x
/ fast rewound while it is pressed H/FE: Adjusts volume Using the Submenu of the Folder List See Using the Submenu of the Folder List of images (P168) for the submenus available. 174 Using the Submenu of the Moving Image File List Setting item/Setting at purchase > P259 1. From the Moving Image File List (P173), select a file ] M[Menu] ] Select from the following Submenu items Play Plays back the selected file. New folder 1 You can create a folder. Files 1 Move 2 : You can move the selected file to another folder. Select a folder to move > C > I [Paste]. Copy 2 : You can copy the selected file to another folder. Select a folder to move > C > I [Paste]. Delete : You can delete the selected file. Delete all : You can delete all files in the folder. If you delete all files, you need to enter your terminal security code. Rename : You can change the name of the selected file. Mark/Unmark 1 You can move, copy or delete multiple files. After selecting , M [Menu] > File > Select Move/Copy/
Delete. Mark 2 : You can select a file at a time. Mark all : You can select all the files collectively. Unmark : You can deselect the file selected by Mark or one of the files selected by Mark all at a time. Unmark all : You can deselect the file selected by Mark or all the files selected by Mark all. Send via mail 1 3 You can attach a file to i-mode mail for sending. Go to step 2 (P149) of Compose i-mode mail. Ringtones Set a ring alert for incoming voice and video-phone calls. Voice call : Set a selected file as a ring alert for incoming voice calls. Video-phone : Set a selected file as a ring alert for incoming video-phone calls. Sort by You can sort files. View by You can change file display methods. Memory info. You can check the status of the storage area on the FOMA phone, etc. File property You can check the name, size, type, created time, resolution or file restriction of the selected file. Data box 1: You cannot use the file in Pre-installed folder. 2: You cannot move or copy the file in Pre-installed folder. 3: You cannot use this menu in restricted file. Using the Submenu of the Moving Image Playback Screen For MP4 file with only voice without image, see Using the Submenu of the Melody Playback (P177). Setting item/Setting at purchase > P259 1. From the Moving Image Playback display (P174), M[Menu] ] Select from the following Submenu items Pause 3 (Play 5) You can pause the moving images being played back. Send via mail 1 2 You can compose an i-mode mail attaching a file to it for sending. Go to step 2 (P149) of Composing i-mode message. Expand 3 You can view the whole moving image without displaying the indication of soft key or player. Q: cancel this function. D a t a b o x 175 Data box Snap 2 4 You can save paused moving images as still images. Snapped images are saved into the Camera folder of My picture. Mute (Unmute) You can play back moving images muting the sound. Player settings You can change settings of the visual effect and the color tone of the player. File property Displays the name, size, type, created time, play duration, restriction states, track state, availability as a ring alert, title, creator, copyright and description of a moving image file being played. 1: You cannot use this menu in Pre-installed menu. 2: You cannot use this menu for restricted file. 3: You can use this menu only on playing the file. 4: You can use this menu only on pause. 5: You can use this menu while pausing or after ending to play back the file. Playing back/Managing/Melody C]
(Data box) ]3 You can play back pre-installed melodies, and melodies obtained from sites, etc. Playable file format This FOMA phone supports to display file format as follow. D a t a b o x 176 File format 1 Extension name SMF, MFi, MP4 2 mid, mld 1: Some files may not be played even if its format is supported. 2: The voice format of AAC or AMR is saved as 3gp file in i-
motion folder. Information When more than 3,000 files are stored in one folder, if you try to play a melody stored in this folder, it may not be played properly because of lack of memory. In this case, move the file to another folder and play. Playing Back Melody 1. From the Data box menu (P165), Melody Melody [1/3]
Data transfer Pre-installed 47 Files 0 File Folder name The number of files in the folder. i-mode 0 File Menu Open Switch
<Folder List>
I [Switch] : You can change the display type of folder. 2. Select a folder ] C Pre-installed [1/46]
.. Go to Melody Alarm01.mid 2.3KB Alarm02.mid 1.8KB See step 2 Display screen for the mark on display screen. File name/File size Alarm03.mid Open 2.0KB Switch Menu
<Melody File List>
I [Mail] : You can attach the file to i-mode mail. Go to step 2 on page 149 of Composing i-mode mail. 3. Select a file ] C Volume Playback bar Playback elapsed time /
maximum playback time Menu Pause
<Melody Playback>
C, G: Plays back / pauses J: Plays pack the previous file / next file J(Press and hold): Melodies are fast forwarded /
fast rewound while pressing it. H/FE: Adjusts the sound volume Data box I[
]: Sets the repeat area (Starting point/
Ending point) If you press after setting, you can release it. Information When you play an MFI file that auto-repeat is set. you cannot pause (stop temporarily) while playing the file after second play back. To pause the file, select Pause from the sub menu. > P178 Using the Submenu on the Folder List For the submenu items available see Using the Submenu of the Folder List of Images (P168). Using the Submenu of the Melody File List See Using the Submenu of the i-motion File List (P174) for the Submenus available. Information If you delete the melody set as the tone for incoming call, alarm or schedule, each melody returns to setting at purchase. D a t a b o x Using the Submenu of the Melody Playback Screen Setting item/Setting at purchase > P259 1. From the Melody Playback display (P177), M [Menu]
] Select from the following Submenu items 177 Data box Pause 4 (Play 5) You can pause the melody being played back. Send via mail 1 2 You can attach melody files to i-mode mail for sending. Go to step 2 (P149) of Composing i-mode mail. Ringtones 2 3 You can set a ring tone for voice or video phone calls. Mute (Unmute) You can mute the tone for playing back melodies. Set repeat 3 4 You can select a repeat method of melody. None : You can cancel repeat setting. Current file (
) : You can repeatedly play back the current melody. All files (
) : You can repeatedly play back all the melodies in the folder. Shuffle : You can shuffle and play back all the melodies in the folder. File property You can display the name, size, type, created time, duration, ringtone and file restriction of the selected file. 1: You cannot use the menu in pre-installed folder. 2: You cannot use this menu for restricted file. 3: You cannot use this menu in MP4 file, if image is not recorded. 4: You can use this menu only on playing. 5: You can use this menu only on pause or after ending to play back. 6: You cannot use this menu on pause or after ending to play back. Information You can also change settings of the ring tone from the Melody File List Screen. From the Melody File List screen
(P177), press M[Menu] select a Ringtone.
) 5 Area repeat (
You can specify a playback area for playing back melodies. You can set the starting point by performing this operation. You can set the ending point by repeating the same operation or pressing I
Player settings You can change settings of the visual effect and the color tone of the player.
]. D a t a b o x 178 Using Alarm ..........................................180 Setting the Custom Menu ....................181 Using the Infrared Communication Function................................................182 Using Calculator...................................184 Using Unit Converter............................185 Using World Time.................................187 Using Stop Watch ................................188 Tools Tools 1 Alarm 2 Custom menu 3 Receive Ir data 4 Calculator 5 Unit converter 6 World time 7 Stop watch Select Tools Select To display the Tools menu On the Stand-by display, C [Menu] ]
(Tools) or Tools 179 Tools Using Alarm C]
(Tools) ]1 You can set Alarm to alert you at the specified time. You can also set Snooze or an alarm tone. Setting Alarm Setting item/Setting at purchase > P242 1. From the Tools menu (P179), Alarm Icon Description Alarm is set to ON Alarm is set to repeat
<Alarm List>
T o o s l I [ON]/[OFF] : You can set the alarm ON or OFF. 2. Select the alarm to edit ] C ] Select the item to edit ] C ] After editing, I [Done].
(Setting ON/OFF) You can select ON or OFF. To set Alarm, select ON. Time setting You can set the time for making the Alarm sound. 180
(Setting repeat) You can select the type of repeat. If you set Except holiday, the alarm does not alert on Sunday or holiday (P192).
(Melody) You can select an alarm tone. Select from alarm tone stored in Melody in Data box. >P176
(Memo) You can enter an alarm name. Turbo Alarm Set an alarm to sound at the maximum volume and the vibration to operate at the maximum level. Select OFF when not setting the turbo alarm. Snooze Select the time intervals of Snooze. If you do not want to use Snooze, select OFF. If Snooze is set to ON, the alarm repeats up to 12 times. When the Specified Time Comes When the specified time comes, the display informing of Alarm appears and the Alarm sounds. To stop Alarm, perform the following operations:
C[OFF]: Alarm stops. When Snooze is set to ON, it is canceled. I[Snooze]: Alarm stops. The set Snooze continues. a During a Voice/Video-phone Call An alarm does not sound at the specified time during a call because the icon is not displayed on upper side. After ending the call, the alarm will be alerted on time. After ending to play a file/to take image, the alarm will be sounded with displaying alarm screen. If you receive a voice call or video-phone call during Alarm notification, Alarm is temporarily stopped, and the Alarm is resumed after terminating the call. a During playing back moving image, melody/
activating camera, video camera An alarm does not sound at the specified time during a call but the icon is displayed on upper side. After ending the call/shooting, the alarm screen is displayed and alarm sounds. Information If the FOMA phone is not turned on, the alarm does not sound. If the alarm cannot be sounded during activating i-appli, the blinks on upper part of the screen instead of alarm icon alarm sound to notify that the set time has come. The alarm sounds after i-appli is finished. Tools Using the Submenu of the Alarm List Screen 1. From the Alarm List screen (P180), M[Menu] ]
Select from the following Submenu items Edit You can edit the selected alarm. Go to step 2 on page 180 of Setting alarm. ON/(OFF) You can activate/deactivate the selected alarm. Mark/Unmark Select and set 1 or more of edited alarms ON or OFF. After selecting alarm(s), select M [Menu] >
ON/OFF. Mark: You can mark 1 alarm at a time. Mark all: You can mark all alarms at once. Unmark: You can unmark 1 alarm at a time, which you selected by Mark or Mark all. Unmark all: You can collectively unmark all alarms you selected by Mark or Mark all. T o o s l Setting the Custom Menu C]
(Tools) ]2 You can specify functions to store in the Custom menu. If you store functions frequently used in the Custom menu, you can quickly start the functions simply by pressing Don the Stand-by display. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P242 Next Page 181 Tools 1. From the Tools menu (P179), Custom menu Custom menu 1 Search phonebook 2 Mail 3 i-mode 4 Camera-mode 5 Alarm 6 Select ringtone 7 [Menu7]
Menu Edit
<Custom Menu>
C [Select]: You can activate the selected menu. I [Edit]: You can change the menu saved as Select Custom. 2. Select a blank line ] I [Add]
The list of functions that can be stored in the Custom menu appears. 3. Select a function ] C You cannot select the menu which is already registered. Using the Submenu of the Custom Menu Display 1. From the Custom menu display (See above), M [Menu]
]Select from the following Submenu items Add new 1 You can add a function to be registered from the function list. Go to step 3 of Setting the Custom Menu (See above). T o o s l 182 Open 2 You can start the function selected. Edit 2 You can change the functions registered. Go to step 3 of Setting the Custom Menu (See above). Delete 2 You can delete a function registered at a time. Delete all You can delete all the registered functions collectively. 1: This Submenu item is displayed when a blank line is selected. 2: This Submenu item is displayed when a registered function is selected. Using the Infrared Communication Function C]
(Tools) ]3 You can send and receive data such as Phonebook and Bookmark using the infrared communication to and from other FOMA phones and personal computers supporting the infrared communication function. Tools The data to send by infrared Information Data Phonebook Bookmark Contents Sending / Receiving 1 or multiple data (Phonebook of FOMA phone) Data that can be sent /
received is name / phone number
/ mail address / note / web page.
(vCard items) Own number Sending / Receiving 1 or multiple data (Bookmark of FOMA phone) Data available in infrared communication is title / URL.
(vBookmark items) During infrared communication, do not remove the battery. If you remove the battery during communication the data via infrared, this operation will be stopped. If the battery level is low, you cannot exchange the data via infrared. Before activating this menu, check the battery level. The amount of data that can be received varies depending on the capacity of the memory. If you cannot receive data, delete unnecessary data, and then activate infrared menu again. Before activating the infrared between the other phone, check the infrared compatibility of each equipment. You may not be able to exchange data via infrared even if the other party supports infrared communication function. While performing infrared communication, call, i-mode or data transmission cannot be performed as the FOMA phone becomes the same status as out of of the service area. Performing Infrared Communication Place the FOMA phone parallel to another device so that the infrared data ports of these devices face each other. The infrared data port is located on the right side of the FOMA phone. >P28 Place the FOMA phone on a stable location such as a table and do not move it during communication. The distance for infrared communication should be within 20 cm. Use Infrared communication within 15 degrees from the center line. Sending Data Make the receiving end ready for receiving the data and then start sending data within 30 seconds following the steps below.
<Example: When you want to send/receive a phonebook via infrared communication>
1. Display of the data to be sent ] M [Menu] ]
Send Ir data ] Focusd data/All data ]
Yes
: Not displayed when sending a bookmark. T o o s l 183 Tools 2. Make sure that the receiving end is ready for receiving the data ] Yes When sending all items, enter a terminal security code
(P104) and authentication password .
: Enter the same password as that entered from the receiver's terminal. Receiving Data 1. Select Receive Ir data from Tools menu (P179) 2. Perform sending operation on sender's terminal 3. Receive/Receive all ] OK When receiving all items, enter a terminal security code (P104) and authentication password . When receiving 1 bookmark, confirm a bookmark registration screen displayed and press I [Done]. The Phonebook will be registered to the available smallest memory number. The bookmark will be registered at the top of the bookmark list. You can view a received phonebook by Search phonebook (P66) and bookmark by Bookmark
(P121). If you remove the battery pack or turn off the handset while receiving a bookmark via infrared communication and receiving is interrupted, the bookmark received before the interruption will not be saved.
: Enter the same password as that entered from the sender's terminal. T o o s l 184 Using Calculator C]
(Tools) ]4 You can perform calculation such as addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. Use the numeric buttons to enter numbers. 1. From the Tools menu (P179), Select Calculator Calculator func.
AC
< Calculator screen >
*: Used to enter decimal point.
#: Used to enter the parenthesis. Q: Used to delete the number to backward from the end. I[AC]: You can reset all the number and calculation. Using the Function Menu of the Calculator Display 1. From the Calculator display (See above), M[func]
]Select from the following function menu items
Switches between positive and negative numbers.
(period) Does not go to step 2. sin Used for calculation of trigonometric functions. cos Used for calculation of trigonometric functions. tan Used for calculation of trigonometric functions. log Used for calculation of logarithmic functions. ln Used for calculation of natural logarithms (the logarithm assuming e as the base) of the specified positive number. exp Used for calculation of exponential functions. sqrt Used for calculation of square roots (root). deg Specifies the unit of angle to degree. rad Specifies the unit of angle to radian. Radian expresses the angle in constant number n (n radian equals to 180 degree). 1 radian (360 degree/2) equals to approx. 57.29578 degree, 1 degree (2/360 degree) equals to approx. 0.01745 radian (=3.141592653).
(Step) 2. Enter the number ] M [=]
Tools Using Unit Converter This is a useful function to convert currency, surface, length, weight, temperature, volume, and velocity. Converting Unit of Currency C]
(Tools) ]51 This is a useful function for converting the yen on hand to the dollar, etc. Setting at purchase > P242, P243 1. From the Tools menu (P179), Unit converter ]
Currency The screen for converting a currency is displayed.
(P186) 2. Select the currency ] I [Rate]
Currency unit filed Value entry field T o o s l
<Currency Unit Conversion>
185 Tools 3. Select next item ] After setting, press I [Done]. 2. Select next item. Currency unit field Select the unit of the currency. If you press C, you can edit the currency. However, you cannot change
. Value entry field You can set the currency exchange rate. For example, in case you convert from
(Dollar) to 120
), you can set to 120,
#: Enters the decimal point. Q : Deletes the number you entered from the
(Yen) (Ex. 1 to 1. end. Converting the currency Converts a currency that exchange rate is set to another currency. You can enter the currency whichever field to convert. The value after conversion is displayed in the other field. 1. Unit converter from Tool(P179) ] Currency T o o s l
<Currency conversion display>
186 Currency unit field You can select the unit before / after conversion. Exchange rate entry field Enter the amount of the currency to convert. The amount after the conversion is displayed in the other field.
#: You can enter decimal point. Q: Deletes the character you entered from the end. I[Reset]: You can reset all the number you entered. Converting Unit of Surface C]
(Tools) ]52 You can change the unit of surface. You can enter the unit in up / down field to enter. The number after the conversion is displayed in the other field. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P243 1. From the Tools menu (P179), Unit converter ]
Surface The Surface Unit Conversion display appears Surface Acre Hectare List 0 0 Surface unit field Value entry field
<Surface Unit Conversion>
Surface unit field You can select the unit of surface before/after conversion. Value entry field Enter a numerical value of the surface to be converted. The number after the conversion is displayed in the other field.
#: Enters the decimal point. Q: Deletes the number which you already entered from the end. I: [Reset]: The numerical value is reset. The maximum input value is an integer of 10 digits and 8 digits after the decimal point. However, when you input an actual number, the maximum input value is 10 digits including the decimal point. The maximum output value is an integer of 10 digits and 6 digits after the decimal point. However, it will be the value rounded off to six decimal places. Converting Unit of Length/Weight/
Temperature/Volume/Velocity C]
(Tools) ]53~7 Setting item/Setting at purchase > P243,P244 1. From the Tools menu (P179), Unit converter
]Length/Weight/Temperature/Volume/Ve locity Tools For the subsequent operations, perform the same operations as Converting Unit of Surface (P186). Using World Time C]
(Tools) ]6 You can check the date and time of major cities in the world. The time of city Home is set to the time of Setting date/time (P95). 1. From the Tools menu (P179), World time The city name and time which are checked
<World Time>
C[List]: You can select a city by displaying the city list. 2. Use Jto select a city to be checked I[Set]: The selected city is set as Home. T o o s l 187 Tools Using the Submenu of the World Time Display Setting item/Setting at purchase > P244 1. From the World time display (P187), M[Menu]
] Select from the following Submenu items Choose city You can choose a city. After choosing, press C. Set time zone Sets the selected city to home.
: This menu is not displayed if you select the city as a home. Using Stop Watch C]
(Tools) ]7 You can use the FOMA phone as a stop watch. 1. From the Tools menu (P179), Select Stop watch C[Go]/[Stop]: You can start or stop measuring. I[Reset]: You can reset the result of measuring. During measuring, you can do the following operations. I[Lap]: The lap time is recorded and displayed at the bottom of the display. M[Detail]: You can view the list of the lap records. T o o s l 188 Using Schedule....................................190 Using Memo.........................................193 Using Date Search...............................194 Using Date Counter .............................195 Stationery Stationery Select Stationery 1 Scheduler 2 Memo 3 Date search 4 Date counter Select To display the Stationery menu On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(Stationery) or Stationery 189 Stationery Using Schedule C]
(Stationery) ]1 Storing Schedule Events 1. From the Stationery menu (P189), Scheduler The monthly display (P191) appears. 2. Select a date to store a schedule event. ] I[Add]
Add new 2006/12/01 (Fri) Time None All day 00:00 ~ 23:59 Subject Edit Done S t a t i o n e r y
<Add new schedule display>
3. Select from the following items to store ] After storing, I[Done]
Start date You can set a date to start the schedule event. You can enter a date by pressing R and dial buttons. You can select a date from the calendar display by pressing C. End date You can set a date to end the schedule event. You can enter a date by pressing J and dial buttons. You can select a date from the calendar display by pressing C. 190 When the Start date and the End date are different, set the End date later than the Start date. None 1 (Schedule type) You can set a type of the schedule event. Time You can set time to start and end the schedule event. You cannot set the starting time and the ending time of one event on different days. For example, if you want to set the starting time to 22:00 of the starting day and set the ending time to 9:00 of the following day, you should set two events, 22:00 to 23:59 on the starting day and 00:00 to 9:00 on the following day. Regardless of the number the days till the ending, the ending time cannot be set earlier than the starting time of the starting day. All day: The schedule event is stored as an all-day event. Set time: You can set time to start and end the event by selecting the time field. You can enter the time using J and dial buttons. Subject You can set a subject of the schedule event. You cannot store the event without entering a subject. Alarm You can set whether or not to be notified by an alarm when the date and time specified in Start date and Time come. You can select a melody 1 when the alarm function is set to other than No alarm. You can select the menu from Melody of Data box.
> P176 Repeat 2 You can set the repeat setting for the schedule event. If you do not want to repeat it, select Once 1: The content you have set is displayed. 2: If Start date and End date are different, you can use only Once. Information You can save up to 200 schedules and up to 100 holidays. When the specified time of a schedule event setting by alarm comes, the display to notify it appears. C [OK]: After stopping the alarm, you can view the time and the subject of schedule. If you press C again, the alarm will be released. I [Snooze]: You can set the snooze. As for the operation of alarm setting during a call or taking a photo, see When the Specified Time Comes (P180). Checking Schedule Events 1. From the Stationery menu (P189), Scheduler 2006 June Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su The date registered the schedule is underlined. The number of schedule events stored in the date on which the cursor is placed.
Select Menu Add
<Monthly Display>
13: You can move the year of date. Stationery 79/FE: You can move the month of date. 5: You can move the cursor to the current date . I [Add]: You can add your own schedule. Go to step 3 on page 190 of Storing Schedule Events. 2. Select a date in which a schedule event is stored
] C Icon Description Sets the alarm setting Sets the repeat setting
<Daily Display>
I [Add]: You can add your own schedule. Go to step 3 on page 190 of Storing Schedule Events. J: Displays the schedule of previous and next day. 3. Select a schedule event ] C View (20/23) 2006/06/01 (Thu) None 10 : 00am ~ 11 : 00am Umbrella No alarm Alarm01.mid Once Edit Delete
<Display>
Icon Description Start date of schedule End date of schedule The type of schedule Holiday Alarm Next Page 191 S t a t i o n e r y Stationery For other icons, see page 190. C [Edit]: You can edit the selected schedule. Go to step 3 on page 190 of Storing Schedule Events. I [Delete]: You can delete the selected schedule. J: Displays the previous and next schedule. Using the Submenus of the Monthly Display 1. From the monthly display (P191), M [Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items. Add new You can add a new schedule event. See step 2
(P190) of Storing Schedule Events. Open You can see the details of the schedule events of the selected date (Daily display). Set holiday You can set the selected date to holiday. After entering the holiday name, press I [Done]. The setting date is marked in red color on Monthly view. On the day: Enter the holiday name and set the selected date as a holiday. Weekly: Enter the holiday name and set the selected day of the week as a holiday for every week. Monthly: Enter the holiday name and set the selected date as a holiday for every month. S t a t i o n e r y 192 Annually: Enter the holiday name and set the selected date as a holiday for every year. Duration (2~31): Enter the holiday name and set the holiday period. Go to date The cursor is moved to the specified date. You can enter a date by pressing J and dial buttons. Delete Holiday: All the schedule events set as holidays are deleted. Old schedules: All the schedule events stored for up to the preceding day of the selected date are deleted. Current day schedules: The schedule events of the selected date are deleted. Current week schedules: All the schedule events of the selected week are deleted. Current month schedules: All the schedule events of the selected month are deleted. All schedules: All the schedule events are deleted. Calendar Type Sunday first: Display a calendar with weeks beginning with Sunday. Monday first: Display a calendar with weeks beginning with Monday.
: You cannot the menu if select the date which you've already set Set holiday. Using the Submenus of the Daily Display Screen 1. From the Daily display screen (P191), M[Menu] ]
Select from the following Submenu items Add new You can add a new schedule event. See Step 3
(P190) of Storing Schedule Events. Open The details of the selected schedule event (Display screen) are displayed. Edit 1 2 You can edit the selected schedule event. See Step 3 on page 190 of Storing Schedule Events. Set holiday 2 You can set the selected date as a holiday. See Holiday settings of Using the Submenus of the Monthly Display Screen (P192) for the setting items. Mark/Unmark You can delete after selecting multiple schedules. After selecting, press I [Delete]. Go to Date Displays the schedule you set. You can enter a date by pressing J and dial buttons. Delete You can delete schedule events. 1: You cannot use this menu when you select the date which is already set as the holiday by Set holiday. Stationery 2: You cannot use this menu when you select the daily display of the date which is already set as the holiday. Using Memo C]
(Stationery) ]2 Creating Memo You can create and save a memo. 1. From the Stationery menu (P189), Memo The memo display (See right) appears. 2. I[Add] ] Enter a memo ] C Viewing Memo You can view the memo that you created. 1. From the Stationery menu (P189), Memo Memo (1/2) 2006/06/01 (Thu) Meeting June 1 2006/06/01 (Thu) Video-phone call Menu Select Add
<Memo>
2. Select a memo to view ] C The screen will be displayed. S t a t i o n e r y 193 Stationery C [Edit]: You can edit the displayed memo. I [Delete]: You can delete the displayed memo. J: Displays the previous and next memo. Using the Submenus of the Memo Display/
Display Screen 1. From the Memo display (P193)/Display screen, M
[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Add new You can create a memo. Open You can display the screen of the selected memo. Edit You can edit the selected/displayed memo. Mark/Unmark You can select and delete multiple memos. After selecting, press I [Delete]. Delete You can delete the memo selected or displayed memo. S t a t i o n e r y
: This menu is not displayed in submenus of the displayed screen. Using Date Search C]
(Stationery) ]3 You can search for the number of days (target date) after a specified period from a specified date. For instance, you can search for the date after 90 days from the current date for convenience. 1. From the Stationery menu (P189), Date search
] Select from the following setting items I [Reset]: You can reset all setting values. From You can enter a date to start the search. Enter the date using J and the dial buttons. After You can enter the number of days. Use the dial buttons to enter the number of days. For instance, if you want to know the date after 90 days from the Start date, enter 90. 194 Stationery Using Date Counter C]
(Stationery) ]4 Displaying Date Counter 1. From the Stationery menu (P189), Date counter If you store the name and date of an event such as a birthday, you can check how many days remain before the event or how many days have passed after the event. Storing Events in Date Counter 1. From the Stationery menu (P189), Date counter The Date counter display (P187) appears. 2. I[Add] ] Select from the following setting items
] After setting, I[Done]
(Date) You can set the date of an event. Enter the date using J and the dial buttons.
(Memo) You can enter a memo. You cannot set without entering. Date counter (1/2)
- 1 Meeting 2006/05/31 Destination +16 2006/06/17 before a number: The number of days before the specified date
+ before a number: The number of days after the specified date Select Menu Add
<Date Counter>
I[Add]: You can compose the date counter. Go to step 2 (See above) of Storing Events in Date Counter. 2. Select a date counter ] C View (1/2) 2006/05/31 (Wed) Meeting S t a t i o n e r y D-day : -1 Edit Menu Delete
<Display Screen>
C [Edit]: You can edit the selected date counter. Go to step 2 (P195) of Storing Events in Date Counter. I [Delete]: You can delete the selected daily counter. Next Page 195 Stationery J: Displays the date counter of previous and next day. Using the Submenu of the Date Counter Display/Display Screen 1. From the Date counter display (P195)/display screen (P195), M[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Add new You can store an event to the date counter. See Step2 (P195) of Storing Events in Date Counter. Open You can view the selected date counter. Edit You can edit the selected or displayed date counter. See Step2 of Storing Events in Date Counter. Mark/Unmark This function is used when you select and delete multiple date counters. After selecting, press I
[Delete]. Delete You can delete the selected or displayed date counter.
: This menu is not displayed in submenus of screen. S t a t i o n e r y 196 Network Service NW service Select NW service 1 Voice mail 2 Call waiting 3 Call forwarding 4 Nuisance call barring 5 Caller ID notification 6 Caller ID request 7 Set arrival act Select To display the Network service menu On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]
(NW service) or NW service In this manual, the outline of the network service is explained by the method of using the FOMA handset menu. For details, refer to Network Services User's Guide. 197 Available Network Services .................198 Using Voice Mail ...................................198 Using Call Waiting Service...................200 Using Call Forwarding Service.............201 Using Nuisance Call Barring Service...202 Using Caller ID Notification Service ....202 Using Caller ID Request Service..........203 Using Set Arrival Act ............................203 Selecting Arrival Call Act......................203 Setting Remote Control........................204 International Roaming Service.............204 Registering Additional Services...........205 Registering Additional Guidance .........206 Using English Guidance .......................206 Using Service Dialing Number .............207 Using Call Barring.................................207 Network Service Available Network Services With FOMA phone, following DoCoMo Network Services are available. Service Voice Mail Application Required Monthly fee Charged Reference See right Call Waiting Service Required Charged Call Forwarding Service Required Free Nuisance Call Barring Service Required Free Caller ID Notification Service Not required Free Caller ID Request Service Not required Free Remote control Not required Free International roaming service Not required Free English Guidance Not required Free Service Dialing Number Not required Free Public mode (drive mode) Not required Free Public mode (power off) Not required Free N e t w o r k S e r v c e i P200 P201 P202 P202 P203 P204 P204 P206 P207 P51 P54 In this manual, the summaries each network service are explained in the ways using the menu of the FOMA phone. For detail, see Mobile Phone User's Guide
[Network services]. 198 This FOMA phone is not applicable to all the services described in Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network services]. Contact DoCoMo Information Center on the back of this manual for application or inquiry. Information The Network Services that are operated by connecting to the is Network Service Center are not available when When displayed on your handset. You can register newly provided network services when additionally provided by DoCoMo. > P205 Using Voice Mail C]
(NW Service) ]1 When you are in an area where radio waves do not reach, when you turn off the FOMA phone or when you cannot answer the call, this service answers to the party who made a voice/video-phone call to you, and the Voice Mail Center holds voice mail messages for you. When you did not answer a voice call or video-phone call that came in while Voice Mail is activated, it is recorded to the received call history as a missed call and a screen notifying a missed call appears. This handset is not applicable to Voice Mail (Video-phone call). Make a voice call to 1412 (free) and set not to be applicable to video-phone call. If a call comes in from a caller not notifying caller ID with Caller ID request activated, the Caller ID Request guidance is played back and the center will not hold voice mail messages. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Voice mail ] Select from the following setting items Activate voice mail You can start using Voice Mail. Set ringing time You can set the time from the first ring until the call is connected to the Voice Mail Service Center. (period) Deactivate voice mail You can stop using Voice Mail. Voice mail status request You can check the current settings of Voice Mail Service. If you press M [Menu], you can start/stop the service of voice mail or set the length of ringing time. Play messages You can play back recorded Voice Mail messages. Voice mail setting You can connect to the Voice Mail Service Center to change the settings of Voice Mail by following the voice guidance. Check messages You can check whether or not new messages are recorded. Network Service Notify missed call If the FOMA phone is turned off or out of the service area, you are informed by SMS (Short Message Service) of missed calls when the FOMA phone is turned on or in the service area again. Activate missed call notification: You can start using Missed Call Notice Service. Deactivate missed call notification: You can stop using Missed Call Notice Service. Missed call notification status request: You can check the settings of the Missed Call Notice Service. Delete voice mail icon You can delete Set message alert ringer You can set the ring tone to sound when a new message is recorded. displayed in the icon view area. N e t w o r k S e r v c e i 199 Network Service Using Call Waiting Service C]
(NW Service) ]2 When you receive another voice call during a call, you will be notified of it by busy ring tone, and you can put the current call on hold to answer the new call. You can also newly make a call to another party by putting the current call on hold. To use Call Waiting Service, set Arrival Call Act (P203) to Answer beforehand. If this is set to another setting, you cannot answer the incoming voice call while you are performing a voice call even if you start Call Waiting Service. When using Call Waiting, set Arrival call act to Answer. > P203 N e t w o r k S e r v c e i If a call comes in from a caller not notifying caller ID while Caller ID Request Service is set to Activate caller ID Request, the Caller ID Request guidance is played back and Call Waiting is not available. When a video-phone call comes in during a voice call, or a voice call comes in during a video-phone call, Call Waiting does not work. The second call is recorded as a missed call in Received Calls. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Call waiting ] Select from the following setting items Activate call waiting You can start using Call Waiting. 200 Deactivate call waiting You can stop using Call Waiting. Call waiting status request You can check whether the Call Waiting is activated or deactivated. Submenus on using Call Waiting Service Press to view the submenu. a When a new call comes in during a call Voice mail 1 When a new call comes in, the caller can connect the voice mail center. Call rejection You can reject a call without receiving. Call forwarding 2 You can forward the incoming call to the forwarding destination you have registered beforehand. End active call You can answer a new call after disconnecting the current call. Mute/Unmute The voice to send to the other party is set to mute or unmute. 1: You can use the voice mail when you have signed up this service. See Using Voice Mail (P198) for details. 2: You can use the call forwarding service only when you have signed up this service. See Using Call Forwarding Service on the next page. a When you are talking with a party while a call to another party is put on hold (Multi call). Switch Put the current call on hold to enable talking with another party on hold. End End active call: After ending a call, you can take the new call on hold. End held call: You can end a call on hold. End all calls: You can end both calls. Mute/Unmute The voice to send to the other party is set to mute or unmute. Using Call Forwarding Service C]
(NW Service) ]3 This is a service to forward a voice call/video-phone call when you are in an area where radio waves do not reach, you turn off the handset or you did not answer within the set ring time. When you did not answer a voice call or video-phone call that came in while Call Forwarding Service is activated, it is recorded to the received call history as a missed call and a screen notifying a missed call appears. If a call comes in from a caller not notifying caller ID while Caller ID Request Service is set to Activate caller ID Request, the Caller ID Request guidance is played back Network Service and the call is not forwarded. Call Forwarding Service will be automatically deactivated if Voice Mail is set to Activate Voice mail. This service is not available with some billing plans. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Call forwarding ] Select from the following setting items Activate call forwarding You can start using Call forwarding Service. Register fwd number: You can register the phone number of the forwarding destination. If you press M [Search], you can search for phonebook. Set ringing time: You can set the time from the first ring until the call is forwarded. Deactivate call forwarding You can stop using Call forwarding Service. Register the forwarding number You can change the phone number of the forwarding destination. If you press M [Search], you can search for phonebook. Setting at forwarded party busy You can set an incoming call to be connected to the Voice Mail Service Center if the forwarded destination is busy. Call forwarding status request You can check the current setting status of Call Forwarding Service. N e t w o r k S e r v c e i 201 Network Service Setting to enable or disable call forwarding guidance Press 1429A. Make settings following the voice guidance. For details, see Mobile Phone User's [Network services]. Using Nuisance Call Barring Service C]
(NW Service) ]4 This is a service to reject "Nuisance calls" such as prank calls. If you register a caller to reject, calls from the caller will be automatically rejected and the caller will be answered by the guidance. Even if a call from a caller who is registered to be rejected, the ring tone will not sound, and the call will not be recorded in the received call history. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Nuisance call barring ] Select from the following setting items Register nuisance caller You can register the phone number of the call that you answered the last for rejection. Delete all entries All the phone numbers registered for rejection are deleted. N e t w o r k S e r v c e i 202 Delete most recent entry You can delete the phone number registered last for rejection. Using Caller ID Notification Service C]
(NW Service) ]5 You can notify your phone number to the other party when making a call. When the other party's phone is the digital terminal that supports caller ID, your phone number appears on the other partys phone. Your caller ID is important information, so take great care to notify it. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Caller ID notification ] Select from the following setting items Activate/Deactivate caller ID notification You can display your phone number on the other party's phone (display) when making a call. To use this service, enter the Network Security Code. Caller ID notification status request You can check the current setting status of Caller ID Notification. Using Caller ID Request Service C]
(NW Service) ]6 This is a service to request for the Caller ID notification by guidance to the call from the party who does not notify Caller ID, and terminate the call. A call that was not answered by Caller ID Request Service will not be recorded in the received call history, and the screen notifying of the missed call does not appear. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Caller ID request ] Select from the following setting items Activate caller ID request You can start using Caller ID Request Service. Deactivate caller ID request You can stop using Caller ID Request Service. Caller ID request status request You can check the current settings of Caller ID Request Service. Using Set Arrival Act C]
(NW Service) ]7 You can activate or cancel the arrival call act set by Selecting Arrival Call Act (See right). You can view the current settings. Network Service 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Set arrival act ] Select from the following setting items Activate arrival act You can start using the response you set in Arrival Call Act. Deactivate arrival act You can stop using the response you set in Arrival Call Act. Arrival act status request You can check the current settings of Set Arrival Act. Selecting Arrival Call Act C]
(NW Service) ]8 You can set how to react to a voice call/video-phone call that comes to a customer who has subscribed to Voice Mail, Call Forwarding Service or Call Waiting Service while performing a call. If you have not subscribed to Voice Mail, Call Forwarding Service or Call Waiting Service, you cannot answer a call while performing a call. To use arrival act, set Set arrival act to Activate arrival N e t w o r k S e r v c e i act. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P237 203 Network Service 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Arrival call act ] Select from the following setting items Answer The phone rings. If Voice Mail, Call Waiting Service, or Call Forwarding Service is activated, the phone follows each setting. Voice mail Connects incoming calls to Voice Mail. Even if Call Waiting Service is activated, the calls are connected to Voice Mail. Call forwarding Forwards incoming calls to the forwarding phone number registered. Even if Call Waiting Service or Voice Mail is activated, the calls are forwarded. Call rejection Rejects incoming calls. Setting Remote Control C]
(NW Service) ]9 This service allows you to operate Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service from touch-tone phones, public phones or DoCoMo's cellular phones. To use Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service overseas, you need to set Remote control to Activate remote control beforehand. N e t w o r k S e r v c e i 204 1. Select Remote control from Network Service menu (P197) ] Select one of the following items to be set Activate remote control Start remote control. Deactivate remote control Stop remote control. Remote control status request Check settings for remote control. International Roaming Service C]
(NW Service) ]0 This service allows you to use functions such as Voice Mail and Call Forwarding Service while you stay overseas. 1. Select International service from NW service menu (P197) ] Select one of the following items to be set Voice mail (Int.)
- Activate voice mail: Start Voice Mail.
- Deactivate voice mail: Stop Voice Mail.
- Play messages: Play recorded voice message.
- Voice mail setting: Check current settings of Voice Mail. Call forwarding (Int.)
- Activate call forwarding: Start Call Forwarding Service.
- Deactivate call forwarding: Stop Call Forwarding Service. Roaming guidance (Int.) Set roaming guidance. Registering Additional Services C]
(NW Service) ]*1 When a new network service is added by DoCoMo, you can register the service to the menu and use. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Others
] Additional service The additional service list will be displayed. 2. I [Edit] ] After editing, press C [Select]
USSD code Enter the service code (USSD) supplied by DoCoMo. Service name Enter any service name. Press I [Edit] to edit. Network Service Using the Submenu of the Additional Service List Screen 1. From the Additional Service List screen, M[Menu] ] Select from the following submenu items Edit Edit a service. Select The selected service is performed. Delete 1 item The selected service is deleted. Delete all All the registered services are deleted.
: Not displayed if an unregistered service is selected. Using Registered Services 1. From the Additional Service List screen, select a registered service ] C N e t w o r k S e r v c e i Next page 205 Network Service Registering Additional Guidance C]
(NW Service) ]*2 When you perform services added by Additional Service, you can register reply messages that correspond to the codes (USSD) returned from the Service Center. The reply message is displayed when the registered code is returned as a reply. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Others
] Additional guidance The reply message list will be displayed. 2. I [Edit] ] After setting, press C [OK]
USSD code Enter the service code (USSD) supplied by DoCoMo. Reply message Enter a reply message name. Press I [Edit] to edit. Using the Submenu of the Reply Message List Screen 1. From the Reply Message List screen, M[Menu]
] Select from the following Submenu items Edit You can set a reply message. N e t w o r k S e r v c e i 206 Delete 1 item The selected reply message is deleted. Delete all The all registered reply messages are deleted.
: Not displayed if an unregistered service is selected. Using English Guidance C]
(NW Service) ]*3 You can set the guidance of setting network services such as Voice Mail or voice guidance such as out of the service area to English. Available Languages Setting Japanese English Japanese +
English English +
Japanese Language Plays back the guidance in Japanese. Plays back the guidance in English. First plays back the guidance in Japanese and then in English. First plays back the guidance in English and then in Japanese. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Others
] English guidance ] Select from the following setting items Guidance setting Outgoing + Incoming call: You can set languages of the guidance for outgoing and incoming calls. Select Yes and then select a language. Outgoing call: You can set a language of the guidance only for outgoing calls. Select Yes and then select a language. Incoming call: You can set a language of the guidance only for incoming calls. Select Yes and then select a language. Guidance status request You can check the current settings of the guidance. Using Service Dialing Number C]
(NW Service) ]*4 You can make a call to DoCoMo Information Center or DoCoMo repair counter. The displayed item may differ or some items may not be displayed depending on the FOMA card. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Others
] Service dialing number ] Select from the following items Network Service
(DoCoMo Malfunction information) Connect to the DoCoMo repair counter. Connect to the DoCoMo Information Center.
(General information) Using Call Barring C]
(NW Service) ]*5 You can block all incoming calls while you are roaming outside Japan with the FOMA phone. 1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Others
] Call barring ] Select from the following setting items Activate barring of incoming call - roam Barring all incoming calls: All incoming calls are restricted. Enter your Network Security Code. Data calls barring: Only incoming video-phone calls are restricted. Enter your Network Security Code. Deactivate barring of incoming call - roam You can stop using Barring All Incoming When Roam. Enter your Network Security Code. Barring of incoming call - roam status request You can check the settings of Barring All Incoming When Roam. N e t w o r k S e r v c e i 207 Data Transmission Data Transmission Available from the FOMA phone ..................................210 Before Use............................................211 Glossary of Data Transmission Terms ....................................................212 Preparation Flow for Data Transmission ........................................213 AT command ........................................213 As for data transmissions, refer to Manual for data transmission in CD-ROM for details. To read this manual, it is recommended to set up Adobe Reader
(Over Ver 6.0). If this program is not installed in your personal computer yet, install it from the attached CD-ROM to read the manual. For details, see the Help of Adobe Reader. 209 Data Transmission Data Transmission Available from the FOMA phone The data transmission services you can use by connecting the FOMA phone to a personal computer are classified as follows: packet transmission, and data transfer (OBEX). This FOMA handset does not support 64K data transmission. This FOMA handset is not applicable with Remote Wakeup. This FOMA handset does not support FAX transmission. This FOMA phone is applicable only to packet transmission through IP connection (mopera U, etc.). It is not applicable to packet transmission through PPP connection. Types of Available Transmission Packet Transmission This service charges a transmission fee according to the amount of data you sent and received. The packet transmission is suitable for sending and receiving data only when data transmission is required, with a device always connected to the network. This service is provided by best effort that the communication speed varies depending on the communication environment and traffic of the network. It uses an access point which supports FOMA packet transmission such as mopera U, an Internet connection service for FOMA, and allows data transmission at a 210 maximum rate of 384kbps in downloading and 64kbps in uploading. FOMA L602i allows data transmission overseas using an access point compatible with W-CDMA or GPRS packet transmission. Note that uploading and downloading a massive amount of data results in a high amount of communication fee. Data Transfer (OBEX) This service transfers data using infrared rays. This data transfer service is not chargeable. By infrared communication, you can exchange data with another FOMA phone or a device having the infrared communication function such as a personal computer. Notes for Using Data Transmission Charges of Internet service provider To use the internet, you need to pay the charge for the Internet service provider you use (referred to as provider in this document). Besides the FOMA service fee, you need to pay the charge directly to the Internet service provider. For details on the charges, contact the Internet service provider. You can use the DoCoMo Internet service, mopera U. To use mopera U, subscription (charged) is required. D a t a T r a n s m s s o n i i Setting access point (Internet service provider, etc.) To use the packet transmission, connect to an access point for packet transmission. You cannot connect to the DoPa access point. You cannot connect to PHS 64K or 32K data transmission access point such as PIAFS. About user authentication for accessing network User certification (ID and password) may be required at connection to some access points. In this case, enter your ID and password on the transmission software (dial-up network). An ID and a password are given from a connecting provider or a network administrator of the connecting access point. Consult your Internet service provider or network administrator for details of the ID and password. Conditions for packet transmission To perform the transmission using the FOMA phone by connecting to a personal computer, the following conditions are required. Even when these conditions are satisfied, however, if the base station is congested or the radio wave conditions are bad, you may not be able to perform transmission. The personal computer to be used should support the FOMA USB cable (option). Within FOMA service area. The access point supports IP access of packet transmission (PDP type) of the FOMA. Data Transmission Before Use Operating Environments The following operating environments are applicable to a personal computer used for data transmission:
Item Requirements PC unit PC-AT compatible PC with CD-
ROM drive. USB port (USB Specification Rev1.1/2.0 compliant) Display resolution 800X600 dots, High Color (65,536 colors) or higher recommended. Windows XP, Windows 2000,
(All Japanese editions) Windows XP: 128M bytes or more 2 Windows 2000: 64M bytes or more 2 Free space of 5M bytes or more 2 OS 1 Required memory Hard disk space 1: DoCoMo does not assure the operation from the OS upgrade. 2: Required memory and hard disk space depends on system configuration of a PC. Information Purchase the dedicated FOMA USB Cable (option). The USB cable for personal computer cannot be used because the shape of the connector differs. Next Page 211 D a t a T r a n s m s s o n i i a QoS An abbreviation for Quality of Service, which indicates the quality of network service. For the QoS setting of the FOMA phone, you can specify a communication speed.
: Connection speed may vary depending on communicating conditions, etc. a W-TCP A TCP parameter used to maximize the TCP/IP transmission capability when performing the packet transmission in the FOMA network. To maximize the transmission performance of the FOMA phone, you need to optimize the TCP parameter. a PC Administrator right Means the right with which the user can access all functions of Windows XP and Windows 2000 systems. A user without an administrator right cannot install/uninstall transmission setup files (drivers) and FOMA PC setup software, etc. Data Transmission Glossary of Data Transmission Terms a APN An abbreviation for Access Point Name. Used to identify an Internet service provider or Internet LAN system you access for packet transmission. For example, mopera U is expressed with character string mopera.net in APN. a cid An abbreviation for Context Identifier. A registration number of the APN that is registered in the FOMA phone beforehand for packet transmission. In the FOMA phones, you can register up to 10 cid numbers (1 to 10). a DNS An abbreviation for Domain Name System, which converts a name easy-to-understand for human-being. For example, a domain name mopera.net is converted into an address indicated by a number easy-
to-manage for computer. a PDP type An abbreviation for Packet Data Protocol, which indicates packet transmission. Usually, the type provider indicates will be selected from PPP access point and IP access point.This FOMA phone supports IP access service. For PDP type, consult provider or network service. 212 D a t a T r a n s m s s o n i i Preparation Flow for Data Transmission The following outline shows a preparation flow for packet transmission, and data transfer by connecting a FOMA phone to a personal computer. Packet transmission Data transfer (OBEX) Infrared communication Install L602i transfer setup file onto a personal computer Specify a connecting access point Data transfer (OBEX) Using FOMA PC setup software Not using FOMA PC setup software Using infrared communication > P182 Establish connection Data Transmission Transmission setup files and FOMA PC setup software Attached FOMA L602i CD-ROM contains the transmission setup files (drivers) and FOMA PC setup software. The L602i transmission setup files are software (drivers) required for packet transmission, and data transfer using the FOMA USB Cable (option). The FOMA PC setup software can setup access points
(APN) for packet transmission and dial-up settings easily. AT command AT commands are used to specify and modify the functions of the FOMA phone on the personal computer. FOMA phone is in conformity with AT commands. For details, refer to Data Transmission in attached FOMA L602i CD-ROM. 213 D a t a T r a n s m s s o n i i Entering Characters Entering Characters ............................ 216 List of Character Assignment of Dial Buttons ......................................... 222 215 Entering Characters Entering Characters About Character Entry Display FOMA phone has some functions to enter characters for phonebook or mail. On the Character Entry display, information on the current input mode or operation guidance is displayed. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s
<Character Entry display>
1Remaining number of bytes: Remaining number of characters you can enter is displayed in bytes. 2Operation guidance field: Full-pitch and half-pitch are displayed. 3Input mode field: Input mode is displayed. Setting the prediction conversion to enter character You can set ON/OFF to predict the conversion candidates
(P217) on entering Hiragana. This method is set to ON at purchase. 216 1. From the Character Entry display, M [Menu] ]
Input setting ] Prediction ON/OFF 2. ON/OFF Switching Input Mode 1. Press I [i-mode] on the Character Entry display
(See left) Each time you press I [i-mode], the input mode switches. .. You can enter Kanji and Hiragana. .. You can enter Katakana. You can enter Alphabets.
: Indicates that you can enter the capital letters. You can enter Numerals. Switching Between Full-pitch/Half-pitch You may not be able to switch between full/half-pitch depending on the display of character entry. 1. Press A on the Full Entry display (See left) Each time you press A, the full-pitch and half-pitch modes switch. Entering Characters in Prediction mode You can use this method on setting of Hiragana Entering Characters Switching Pictograph/Symbol/Emoticon Mode You cannot switch the mode depending on the display of character entry. 1. Press Ton the Character Entry display (P216) Each time you press T, the input mode switches. .. You can enter pictographs. .. You can enter full-pitch Symbols. I [Continue]: You can enter characters after
... You can enter half-pitch Symbols. .. You can enter emoticons. selecting multiple. After selecting them, press I
[Set]. A: You can change the page. If you select
, the cursor will be jumped. Entering Characters You can enter characters by pressing dial buttons to which desired characters are assigned. To allocate the character on each button, refer to List of Character Assignment of Dial Buttons (P222). mode. 1. Enter characters on the Character Entry display
(P216) M[KanaA1]: The entered characters are converted to Katakana or Numerals. I[Conv]: The entered characters are converted to Kanji or other characters. C: The entered characters are finalized. 2. Move the cursor to Prediction/Conversion area using H. 3. Select a character to convert ]C Entering Characters in Normal mode When entering the characters in other than Hiragana mode (
), the conversion (after step 2) is not required. 1. On Character Entry display (P216), enter characters M [Katakana/ Numeral] : You can convert the characters on inputting to Katakana or number. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s Next page 217 Entering Characters C [Set] : You can confirm the character on inputting.
: In Hiragana mode 2. D/I [Convert]
3. Move the cursor by pressing H to the area of conversion candidates. 4. Select the character to convert. ] C a Switching Upper / Lower Character Mode To switch upper / lower characters, press * several times after entering characters. If the character is not correspond with each one, you cannot convert it. You cannot convert the character in numeral mode
(1(12)). a Entering Voiced / Semivoiced Marks After entering the character, press A several times. However, you cannot enter a full-pitch character if it does not correspond to a half-pitch character. You cannot enter it in alphabet (a(ab/AB)) or numeral
(1(12)) mode. a Entering a Punctuation Press * several times. You cannot enter it in alphabet (a(ab/AB)) or numeral
(1(12)) mode. a Entering Line Feed Press #/D Press D in numeral mode (1(12) a line feed). E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 218 a Entering a Space M [Menu] > Special input > Select Space. In case of being the cursor at the middle of sentence, press R to enter a space. a Deleting a Character Move the cursor to the character to delete and press Q. If the cursor is at the end of a character, press Q once to delete the character left of the cursor. And, press Q for more than 1 seconds to delete all the characters. Using the Submenu on the Character Entry Display A few menus may not be activated depending on the display of character entry. 1. From the Character Entry display (P216), M [Menu]
] Select from the following Submenu items. Common phrases Input common phrase: You can select and enter the registered common phrases. Edit common phrase: You can create and register common phrases and edit registered common phrases. Go to step 2 in Editing Common Phrases
(P220). Edit character You can specify a range to copy/cut and paste characters. Go to Copying/Cutting/Pasting (P219). Edit word You can register words. Go to step 2 (P221) of Registering Words. Quote Phonebook: You can access a Phonebook entry and quote the registered contents. Go to step 3 on page 66 of Searching Phonebook. Own number: You can bring up your own number and quote the registered contents. Input setting Full/Half: You can switch between full-pitch and half-pitch. Upper/Lower : You can switch between upper case and lower case of Alphabets (a/A (ab/AB)). Prediction ON/OFF: You can activate/deactivate the Prediction and Conversion function. Special input Changing line: You can start a new line. Space: You can enter a space before the cursor. Kuten code: You can enter characters using the Kuten code. Go to step 2 of Entering Characters Using Kuten Code (See right).
: After converting the English mode a(ab/AB), you can activate the menu. You cannot use this menu in other modes. Entering Characters Using Kuten Code You can enter characters or symbols using the 4-digit Kuten code. For details, see Kuten code list (P269). Entering Characters 1. From the Character Entry display (P216), M
[Menu] ] Special input ] Kuten code 2. Enter a Kuten code using the numeric buttons ]
C You can also select characters or symbols using K. Copying/Cutting/Pasting You can copy or cut a character string and paste it to another display/position. 1. From the Character Entry display (P216), M
[Menu] ] Edit character ] Copy/Cut 2. Move the cursor to the start position using K ]
C 3. Move the cursor to the end position using K ]
C 4. Display the Character Entry display to which you want to paste the copied/cut characters ] Move the cursor to the desired position for pasting using K. 5. M [Menu] ] Edit character ] Paste ] Yes Select M [Menu] ] Edit character ] Undo in sequence to undo cut or pasted characters. Information If the number of characters which are copied or cut from the sentence exceeds the limit, you can paste them after deleting the characters over the limit. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s Next Page 219 Entering Characters To paste the character after copying or cutting, its type should be same. For example, you cannot enter (half pitch of Alphabet and numeral) Hiragana or Kanji in screen to input mail address. If you paste character lines including a line feed in the entry screen that line feeds cannot be entered, it is replaced by a blank (half-pitch space). Editing Common Phrases You can edit registered common phrases or add new common phrases. 1. From the Character Entry display (P216), M
[Menu] ] Common phrases ] Edit common phrase Edit common phrase 1 Internet 2 Greeting 3 Business 4 Private 5 Reply 6 Pictograph idiom 7 Original Menu Select
<Edit common phrase>
2. Select Category ] C E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s The Select Common phrase display appears. If you press C in common phrase list, you can view all categories. If you register new phrase, select Original. 220 3. Select a common phrase to be changed ] I[Edit]
] Edit/input the common phrase ] C Using the Submenus of the Edit Common Phrase Display/ Select Common Phrase Display / Input Common Phrase Display 1. From the Edit Common Phrase display / Common Phrase display, M [Menu] ] Select from the following Submenu items Reset all 1 All common phrases are reset to their defaults. Delete 1 item 2 A selected/displayed common phrase is deleted. Reset 1 item 2 A selected/displayed common phrase is reset to its default. Category reset 2 All common phrases stored in the category are reset to their defaults. Cancel You can cancel editing of common phrases. 1: Not displayed on the submenu of the common phrase display. 2: Not displayed on the submenu of the Edit common phrase display. Information If you activate the menu Reset all, the contents of Original will be deleted. Deleting Words 1. From the Registered Words list, M [Menu] ]
Delete 1 item/Delete all ] Yes Entering Characters Registering Words For those words not displayed as the conversion candidates or words with unusual readings, you can register them with their readings. Once registered, the words are displayed as conversion candidates when their readings are entered. 1. From the Character Entry display (P216), M
[Menu] ] Edit word The registered Words List is displayed. Select a dictionary and press C to confirm the registered words. 2. I [New registration] ] Select the next item to register ] After registering, I [Register]
following Reading You can set reading of Word. Word You can set a word that will be displayed as a conversion candidate when you enter characters registered as Reading. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 221 Entering Characters List of Character Assignment of Dial Buttons You can enter a character by pressing dial button. On pressing each button, you can enter multiple characters as follow the table below. Each time you press the button, the character will be changed. Each time you press #, the character will be changed in reverse order. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 222 1: In full-pitch mode, or 2: You can enter a character only in full-pitch mode. 5: If you set capital mode in Switching Capital/Small letter mode (P219), the capital letter will be displayed at first. is displayed only when the character to which 3: In half-pitch mode, ~ is displayed. can be added is displayed. or 4: You can enter a character only in half-pitch mode. Overseas Use International Roaming Service ........... 224 Setting the Network Mode.................. 225 Confirming Before Using Overseas.... 225 Using the FOMA Phone Overseas...... 227 223 Overseas Use International Roaming Service Overseas Networks and Services Available International roaming service (WORLD WING) is a service that allows you to make calls or communications overseas using the same phone number as that used in Japan, utilizing networks of affiliate telecommunications carriers overseas. Refer to Network Services User's Guide
(Chapter of International Service) for details of the communications services available while in international roaming. The International Service web page of DoCoMo offers the downloadable latest version of Network Services User's Guide (Chapter of International Service) as well as the latest information about WORLD SERVICE:
http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/world/
Application for WORLD WING The customer who subscribed to the service on or after September 1, 2005 is not required to apply to this service. However, the customer who declined this service at subscription to the FOMA service is required to apply. The customer who subscribed to the FOMA service on and before August 31, 2005 and has not applied to the WORLD WING is required to apply to this service. This service is not available with some billing plans. O v e r s e a s U s e 224 See Network Name (P98) to display the network name on connecting and to set it. Network Icon Voice 3G GPRS GSM O O O Packet transmission
(i-mode, mopera U, etc.) SMS Video-
phone O O X O O O O X X Services marked with O in the table above may not be available depending on the mobile phone carrier being used or the place of stay. See the International Service web page of DoCoMo for details about services available in each country or region http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/world/
Information You can set to display Japan time together with the local time on the stand-by display. > P81 Overseas Use Setting the Network Mode Confirming Before Using Overseas C]
(Settings) ]52 Network mode of the FOMA phone is set to Auto at purchase. If you know the network in your area, you can select it directly. Setting item/Setting at purchase > P251 1. From the Settings menu (P85), Network ]
Network mode ] Select from the following setting items Auto Searches all the networks connectable. WCDMA only Searches only networks supporting 3G. GSM only Searches only networks supporting GSM/GPRS. For the network search setting (changing of the communication carriers), see P96. Information You cannot exchange the data through packet service under GSM network. When using the FOMA handset in Japan or in the service area of 3G network, we recommend you change the setting of the Network mode to WCDMA only to save battery power. Before Departure Charging the Battery Make sure of the voltage available in the country or area of stay and use the FOMA Overseas/Domestic AC Adaptor 01
(option) for overseas and domestic usage (a conversion plug adapter according to the place of stay will be required). And, do not charge the FOMA phone using an electrical transformer for overseas travel. Using Voice Mail/Call Forwarding from Overseas Use of the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding service from overseas is part of remote operation and requires the activation of Remote operation before your departure. For details to set the remote operations, refer to Remote Opeartion Settings (P204). Before departure, make sure that you have the Network Security Code, which may be required for remote-
accessing the Voice Mail etc. If you have forget your Network Security Code, visit a DoCoMo Shop or DoCoMo World Counter with an identification such as the drivers license to make necessary changes. O v e r s e a s U s e Next Page 225 Overseas Use Using i-mode Overseas To use i-mode overseas, you need to set International Settings to YES. a To change settings in Japan No packet transmission fees apply. iMenu ] English ] Options ] International Settings ] YES a To change settings outside Japan Packet transmission fees apply. iMenu ] International Settings ] YES If set to NO, you can send and receive i-mode mail messages and view the i Menu only. The setting at purchase is NO. Some i-mode sites may not be available depending on the information provider. Packet transmission fees apply to all types of access from overseas including transmissions that are free of charge in Japan. Japan time applies even if i-mode sites are accessed from overseas. Be careful when registering entries to or deleting entries from My Menu at the beginning or end of a month. O v e r s e a s U s e 226 Using FOMA phone overseas Setting Mobile Phone Carrier The network will be set after searching it automatically if Setting the Network Mode (P97) is set to Auto in international roaming. You can set up beforehand the type of network on searching by Setting the Network Mode (P97). If you search the network automatically, you can set the preferred network by Registering a Network from the list (P97). You can select the network manually. Refer to Selecting the Network Connection Mode (P96). Information Network mode is set to Auto after you search with Network mode set to WCDMA only or GSM only and Network selection set to Auto, Network mode will be set to Auto after searching. If you search with Network mode set to Auto and Network selection set to Auto, the same mode (WCDMA only /
GSM only) of the network (communication carrier) you selected after searching will be set. Settings to be made after returning to Japan After Coming Back to Japan When network settings have been changed for use overseas, may appear in Japan. In that case, make settings given below. You have to set Network selection (P97) to Auto/WCDMA only. You have to set Network selection (P96) to Auto or Manual and select JP DoCoMo-3G on the network selection screen displayed after searching. Using the FOMA Phone Overseas If the other party subscribes to a mobile phone carrier supporting the FOMA video-phone, you can make a video-phone call by pressing T. Making Calls a Making a call to Japan from the country you stay When entering the phone number directly Press 0for 1 or more seconds to display +
]81(Country code for Japan) ]Other partys phone number excluding 0 (zero) at the beginning of the area code ] A( T) Overseas Use Example: When the other party is in one of the 23 wards of Tokyo (area code: 03)
+> 81> 3> XXXX XXXX Making a call to a number registered in phonebook The phonebook list screen (P67) or M[Menu] on phonebook detail screen (P67) ] International call
(Japan) ] C[Call] when recipient's phone number appears Example: When a phone number saved in phonebook has area code 03 (in 23 ward of Tokyo)
+813XXXX - XXXX A recipient's phone number is generated, automatically prefixed with Japan's Cuontry code
+81 and 0 removed from area code. a Calling another WORLD WING/WORLD WALKER user Press 0 for 1 or more seconds to display +
]81(Country code for Japan) ]Other partys phone number excluding 0 (zero) at the beginning of the area code ]A (T) Example: When the other party has a mobile phone number beginning with (090)
+ > 81 > 90 > XXXX XXXX a Calling a mobile phone or fixed-line phone within the country of stay Dial the other partys phone number including the area code ]A ( T) O v e r s e a s U s e 227 Overseas Use a Calling from the country of stay to a mobile phone or fixed-line phone in another country (except for Japan) In some countries or areas such as Italy, 0 may be required. Press 0 for 1 or more seconds to display +
] Country code of the other party ] Other partys phone number excluding 0 (zero) at the beginning of the area code ]A ( T) Receiving calls When a call comes in, A (T) Having Others Call You a Receiving a call from Japan Have the other party call you at your mobile phone number as usual. 090 > XXXX XXXX/
080 > XXXX XXXX ] CALL a Receiving a call from a country other than Japan International access code of the country where you make the call ] 81 (Country code for Japan)
]Your phone number excluding 0 (zero) at the beginning ]CALL O v e r s e a s U s e 228 Troubleshooting Unable to Make or Receive Calls/Always Out of the Service Area/Handset Does Not Turn ON Possible causes for inability to make or receive calls, reception level indication permanently being Out of the service area or the handset not turning on are as follows:
Weak radio waves being received or being out of the service area Failure of the local switchboard or base station or temporary line congestion Wrong operation of the handset Others See the International Service web page of DoCoMo for the latest information about service areas and network interruption:
In addition, make sure of the operation and try the following:
If you are indoors, confirm if the condition is the same outdoors. Confirm if your monthly charges have not exceeded the limit. Turn OFF the handset once and back ON. Manually select the mobile phone carrier to use. If the problem persists after the above troubleshooting procedures are taken, contact the Network Technical Support and Operations Center (P229). If i-mode is inaccessible If i-mode sites other than iMenu is unavailable, first make International Settings (P225). Some sites may not be available depending on the information provider. The i-mode services may not be available depending on the operator being used. Select a mobile phone carrier compatible with packet transmission. For the latest information about overseas carriers compatible with packet transmission, see the International Service web page of DoCoMo. i-mode services offered by overseas carriers are not available. Contact (While outside Japan) If the handset is lost or stolen, etc.
<DoCoMo Information Center> (24-hour service) a Universal Number International Call ID Number for the Universal Number
(See Table 1) 800-0120-0151 Domestic call charges of the country you stay apply if you make a call from a mobile phone. Overseas Use a If the Universal Number (above) is not available International access code for the country of stay
(See Table 2) 81-3-5366-3114 Dialing charges for calls to Japan will apply. Please be aware that you are charged for call fee incurred after the phone or UIM is lost or stolen. Contact the Information Center immediately after the loss and follow the procedures to cancel the service. If the Handset is not Working Properly
<Network Technical Support and Operations Center>
(24-hour service) a Universal Number International Call ID Number for the Universal Number
(See Table 1) 800-5931-8600 Domestic call charges of the country you stay apply if you make a call from a mobile phone. a If the Universal Number above is not available International access code for the country of stay
(See Table 2) 81-3-6718-1414 Dialing charges for calls to Japan will apply. O v e r s e a s U s e Next Page 229 Overseas Use Major Country Codes Country/Region Code Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Canada China Czech Egypt Fiji Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Indonesia Italy Japan Macao Malaysia 61 43 32 55 1 86 420 20 679 358 33 49 30 852 36 91 62 39 81 853 60 O v e r s e a s U s e 230 Country/Region Code Maldives Netherlands New Caledonia New Zealand Norway Peru Philippines Russia Singapore South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Tahiti Taiwan Thailand Turkey UK USA Vietnam 960 31 687 64 47 51 63 7 65 82 34 46 41 689 886 66 90 44 1 84 The International Call ID Numbers for the Universal Number in Table 1 and international access codes in Table 2 are subject to change. Be careful that the Universal Number may be often unavailable when making calls from mobile phones, public phones or hotel phones. International Call ID Number for the Universal Number (Table 1) Country/Region Code Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Canada China Columbia Denmark Finland France Germany Hong Kong Ireland Israel Italy Country/Region Code Luxembourg Malaysia Netherlands New Zealand Norway Philippines Singapore South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand UK USA 00 0011 00 00 0021 011 00 009 00 990 00 00 001 00 014 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 001 001 00 00 00 00 001 00 01 Major International Access Codes (Table 2) Country/Region Code 0011 Australia 00 Belgium 0041 Brazil 0021 0023 011 00 00 00 00 990 00 00 00 001 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 Country/Region Code Malaysia Monaco Netherlands New Zealand Norway Philippines Poland Portugal Russia Singapore South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey UAE UK USA Vietnam Canada China Czech Denmark Philippine Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Indonesia Ireland Italy Luxembourg Macao 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 810 001 001 00 00 00 002 001 00 00 00 011 00 Overseas Use Be careful that the Universal Number may be often unavailable when making calls from mobile phones, public phones or hotel phones. Applying for WORLD WING At DoCoMo e-site a By i-mode iMenu ]
a From a personal computer
e
) e My DoCoMo (http://www.mydocomo.com/) ]
Procedures (
You need to enter your Network Security Code for application by i-mode. You need to enter your DoCoMo ID/Password for application from a personal computer. DoCoMo e-site may not be available for the application depending on the contracted contents. By phone
<DoCoMo Information Center>
a From DoCoMo mobile phone or PHS 151 (toll-free) Not accessible from fixed-line phones, etc. a From fixed-line phones, etc. 0120800000 (Japanese only) Also accessible from a mobile phone or PHS. O v e r s e a s U s e 231 Overseas Use Make sure that you dial the correct number. How to Use WORLD CALL a Check the settings of International Settings
<How to activate WORLD CALL>
C [Menu] ]
International dial ] IDD prefix setting Set to use 009130010 for WORLD CALL. or Settings ] Call feature ]
a Making Display + > Country code > Area code > Other partys phone number > A When you call a mobile phone, dial the mobile phone number after the country code. When the other partys area code or mobile phone number begins with 0, omit the zero when dialing
(This does not apply in some countries/regions). At DoCoMo Shop Your local DoCoMo Shop accepts the application. At the DoCoMo World Counter Applications accepted even on the day of departure. a DoCoMo World Counter Narita International Airport No. 1: 4F Central Building, Narita International Airport Terminal 1 a DoCoMo World Counter Narita International Airport No. 2: B1F Main Building, Narita International Airport Terminal 2 a DoCoMo World Counter Kansai International Airport: 4F Kansai International Airport Terminal Building a DoCoMo World Counter Central Japan International Airport: Business Center P@tio, 3F Central Japan International Airport Terminal Building Processing the application may take time. Allow sufficient time for application at the DoCoMo World Counter. For business hours, refer to Network Services User's Guide (Chapter of International Service). O v e r s e a s U s e 232 Menu list ...............................................234 Pre-installed data .................................260 Symbol/Special Character List............264 Pictograph and Emoticon List .............265 Common Phrase List............................267 Kuten Code List....................................269 List of city in World time ......................278 Multiaccess Combination Patterns .....279 Multitask Combination Patterns..........280 Service Available with FOMA Phones ......................................284 a Connecting with External Devices Introduction of Data Link .....................285 a When You are in Trouble Troubleshooting ...................................286 Error Messages ....................................288 Introduction of Options and Related Equipment ............................................308 Warranty and Maintenance Services ..308 Specific Absorption Rate of the Mobile Phone .......................................311 Export/Re-export regulations of Japan and USA.....................................314 Appendix 233 Appendix You can select the function by pressing the button corresponding with the number in the table below. Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference Menu list i-appli i-mode 1 iMenu 2 Bookmark 3 Screen memo 4 Last URL 5 Go to location 1 Input address 2 URL history 6 Message 1 MessageR 2 MessageF 7 Check new message 8 i-mode setting 1 Home 2 View 1 Character size 2 Image display 3 Scroll A p p e n d x i 234 Pre-installed i-appli only No bookmarks No screen memos http://
No URL history No messages No messages Enable/Disable URL Address: http://
Small/Stadard/Large ON/OFF 1 line/3 lines/5 lines P159 P119 P120 P121 P122 P123 P124 P125 P127 P128 Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference Appendix 4 Message list disp. 1 line/2 lines 3 Certificates 4 Others 1 Connection timeout 2 i-motion auto play 3 Check new message 60 seconds/90 seconds/Unlimited ON/OFF Mail/MessageR/MessageF (All marked) 4 Check settings 5 Reset settings 6 Reset data NW Service 1 Voice mail 1 Activate voice mail 2 Set ringing time 3 Deactivate voice mail 4 Voice mail status request 5 Play messages 6 Voice mail setting 7 Check messages 8 Notify missed call 1 Activate missed call notification 2 Deactivate missed call notification 3 Missed call notification status request P128 P129 P197 P198 P199 A p p e n d x i Next Page 235 Appendix Menu Item 9 Delete voice mail icon 0 Set message alert ringer 2 Call waiting 1 Activate call waiting 2 Deactivate call waiting 3 Call waiting status request 3 Call forwarding 1 Activate call forwarding 2 Deactivate call forwarding 3 Register the forwarding number 4 Setting at forwarded party busy 5 Call forwarding status request 4 Nuisance call barring 1 Register nuisance caller 2 Delete all entries 3 Delete most recent entry 5 Caller ID notification 1 Activate/Deactivate caller ID notification 2 Caller ID notification status request 6 Caller ID request 1 Activate caller ID request A p p e n d x i 236 Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference 1 Register fwd number 2 Set ringing time P199 P200 P201 P202 P203 Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference Appendix 2 Deactivate caller ID request 3 Caller ID request status request 7 Set arrival act 1 Activate arrival act 2 Deactivate arrival act 3 Arrival act status request 8 Arrival call act 9 Remote control 1 Activate remote control 2 Deactivate remote control 3 Remote control status request 10 International service 1 Voice mail (Int.) 1 Activate voice mail 2 Deactivate voice mail 3 Play messages 4 Voice mail setting 2 Call forwarding (Int.) 1 Activate call forwarding 2 Deactivate call forwarding 3 Roaming guidance (Int.) 11 Others Answer/Voice mail/Call forwarding/Call rejection P203 P204 P204 A p p e n d x i Next Page 237 Appendix Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference Not recorded Not recorded Outgoing+Incoming call/ Outgoing call/ Incoming call 2 Additional guidance 3 English guidance 1 Guidance setting 2 Guidance status request 4 Service dialing number 1 5 Call barring 1 Activate barring of incoming call - roam 1 Barring all incoming calls 2 Data calls barring Inbox Folder created by user No messages No messages No messages None Mail 1 Inbox 2 Outbox 3 Unsent message A p p e n d x i 238 P205 P206 P207 P137 P139 P144 P147 Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference Appendix 4 Compose mail 1 Compose message 2 Compose SMS 5 Check new message 6 Receive option 7 Check new SMS 8 Mail setting 1 Communication 1 Receive opt. setting 2 Receive attach file 3 Check new message 4 SMS report request 5 SMS validity term ON/OFF Image, Melody (All marked) Mail, MessageR, MessageF (All marked) ON/OFF None/1 day/2 days/3 days 2 Edit 3 View 1 Edit signature 2 Edit quotation 1 Character size 2 Scroll 3 Mail list display 4 Folder security Auto attach: Marked Signature field: Not marked
Small/Standard/Large 1 line/3 lines/5 lines 1 line subject/1 line address/1 line name/2 lines address/2 lines name Inbox, Outbox, Unsent message (All unmarked) A p p e n d x i Next Page 239 P149 P152 P154 P155 P156 Appendix Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference 5 Melody auto play ON/OFF 4 Others 1 Check settings 2 Reset settings 3 Reset data Data box 1 My picture 2 i-motion 3 Melody Multimedia 1 Camera-mode 2 Movie-mode 3 Camera settings Camera, Data transfer, i-mode Item, Pre-installed Folder created by user Camera, Data transfer, i-mode Pre-installed Folder created by user Data transfer, i-mode Pre-installed Folder created by user No data Only preinstalled file None No data Only preinstalled file None No data Only preinstalled file None 1 Saving option Auto saving 2 Shutter sound 3 Flicker tuning ON/OFF Shutter 1/Shutter 2/Shutter 3 Auto/50Hz area/60Hz area P156 P157 P165 P166 P173 P176 P107 P109 P115 P118 A p p e n d x i 240 Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference Appendix Stationery 1 Scheduler 2 Memo 3 Date search 4 Date counter Phonebook 1 Add to phonebook 2 Search phonebook 1 Show all data 2 Group search 3 Reading search 4 Memory No. search 5 Phone No. search 6 Domain search 3 No. of phonebook Not registered Schedule type Alarm Repeat Not registered Not registered Not registered None/Private/Anniversary/Trip/
Work/Meeting No alarm/On time/Before 15 mins/Before 30 mins/Before 1 hour/Before 1 day/Before 3 days/ Before 1 week Once/Daily/Mon~Fri/Sat~Sun/
Weekly/Monthly/Yearly P189 P191 P193 P194 P195 P63 P64 P66 P70 A p p e n d x i Next Page 241 Appendix Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference 4 Phonebook settings 1 Display data 2 Create domain list Handset only/UIM only 1. @docomo.ne.jp 2~10. Not registered 3 Search by Show all data/Group search/Reading search/
Memory No. search/Phone No. search/Domain search 4 Display image ON/OFF 5 Group settings 6 Own number Tools 1 Alarm Group name: Group 1 - Group 30 (Not setting) Not setting
(ON/OFF setting)
(Repetition setting)
(Turbo Alarm)
(Snooze setting) ON/OFF Once/Daily/Mon~ Fri/
Sat~Sun/Except holiday OFF/ON (Max Ring&Vib) OFF/In 5 mins/In 10 mins/
In 30 mins/In 1 hour/
In 2 hours/In 4 hours/
In 8 hours/In 1 day/In 1 week 2 Custom menu 3 Receive Ir data 1 Search phonebook, 2 Mail, 3 i-mode, 4 Camera-mode, 5 Alarm, 6 Select ringtone, 7~10 Not registered P70 P71 P72 P179 P180 P181 P184 A p p e n d x i 242 Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference Appendix 4 Calculator 5 Unit converter 1 Currency Currency unit
(Yen) /
(Dollar) /
P184 P185 P186
(Euro) /
1 (Currency 1) /
2 (Currency 2) /
3 (Currency 3) /
4 (Currency 4) Acre/Hectare/Square in/
Square feet/Square yd/
Square miles/Square mm/
Square cm/Square m/
Square km mm, cm, m, km, inch, feet, yard, mile mg, g, kg, ton, ounce, pound, stone P187 2 Surface Surface unit 3 Length 4 Weight Length unit Weight unit 5 Temperature Temperature unit Celsius/Fahrenheit A p p e n d x i Next Page 243 Appendix Menu Item 6 Volume 7 Velocity 6 World time 7 Stop watch Sound 1 Ring volume 2 Effect tone volume A p p e n d x i 244 Volume unit Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Milliliter, Liter, Cubic mm, Cubic cm, Cubic meter, Cubic inch, Gallon, Liq.pt, Liq.oz, Fluid oz, Barrel Reference Velocity unit Choose city Home setting Voice call Video-phone Mail tone MessageR tone MessageF tone SMS tone Key tone Power ON/OFF Flip tone Feedback tone km/h, meter/sec, mile/h, feet/sec Tokyo P188, 278 Level 0~7 (Level 3) Level 0~7 (Level 3) Level 0~7 (Level 3) Level 0~7 (Level 3) Level 0~7 (Level 3) Level 0~7 (Level 3) Level 0~7 (Level 3) Level 0~7 (Level 3) Level 0~7 (Level 3) Level 0~7 (Level 3) P76 Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference Appendix 3 Select ringtone 4 Select effect tone 5 Vibration settings Voice call Video-phone Mail tone MessageR tone MessageF tone SMS tone Key tone Power ON/OFF Flip tone Feedback tone Incoming call Message Ring01.mid Ring02.mid Message02.mid Message03.mid Message04.mid Message05.mid OFF/Digital Tone/Japanese/
English/Korean ON/OFF Sound off/Sound1/Sound 2/
Sound3 ON/OFF melody + vibration/Pattern 1 (Vibration only)/Pattern 2 (Vibration only)/OFF melody + vibration/Pattern 1 (Vibration only)/Pattern 2 (Vibration only)/OFF 6 Manner settings Manner mode/Original manner mode 1 Manner mode 2 Original manner mode Incoming call sound Incoming call vib. Message sound Message vibration ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF P77 P78 P79 A p p e n d x i Next Page 245 Appendix Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference 7 Mail ring duration 8 Set mute seconds Display 1 Main display Key tone Flip tone Low battery tone Mail ring ON/OFF Mail ring duraiton 0 Sec. Wallpaper 1 Stand-by display Display items 2 Incoming call 3 Outgoing call 2 Sub display Clock font color Incoming_call_clean.gif Outgoing_call_clean.gif ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Time 3 Sec./Duration 1 Cycle Select file: Vivid red.gif Clock theme: Willy Willy Clock: Digital 1/Digital 2/
Digital 3/Digital 4 Dual clock Calendar + Clock Not display 16 colors in total (black) P79 P80 P75 P80 P81 1 Stand-by display Wallpaper Select file: Sub_vivid red.jpg Clock theme: Tropical P82 Display items Dual clock/Calendar+clock A p p e n d x i 246 Menu Item 2 Incoming call 3 Outgoing call 3 Dial Font 4 Menu style 5 Backlight 6 Color scheme 7 LED Settings Appendix Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference Sub_incoming.gif Sub_outgoing.gif Dial font size Dial font color Grid List Main display Sub display Keypad P82 P83 Small/Large Total 16 colors (Orange) List 10 seconds/30 seconds/60 seconds/
120 seconds/180 seconds 100%/80%/60%/40%
10 seconds/30 seconds/60 seconds/
120 seconds/180 seconds 100%/80%/60%/40%
10 seconds/30 seconds/60 seconds/
120 seconds/180 seconds Green tea black/Cherry pink/Water drop blue/Ceramic white Lighting Incoming voice call ON/OFF Pattern
(red/pink/blue/aqua/green
/yellow) 10 P84 A p p e n d x i Next Page 247 Appendix Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference Incoming video call Receiving mail Receiving messageR Receiving messageF Receiving SMS Playing music Alarm Schedule During a call Pattern
(red/pink/blue/aqua/green
/yellow) 10 9 9 9 9 8 Pattern
(red/yellow/green) Pattern
(yellow/pink/green) Pattern
(green/yellow/blue) Pattern
(blue/yellow/red) Pattern
(aqua/white/pink) Pattern 3 (aqua) Pattern 4 (blue/red) Pattern 1 (aqua) Settings 1 Call/Answer 1 Call/MAil history 1 Received calls 2 Dialed calls 3 All calls No record No record No record A p p e n d x i 248 P84 P85 P86 P87 Menu Item 4 Received mails 5 Sent mails 6 All mails 2 Call duration 3 Auto answer 4 Reject/Accept call 5 Answer mode 2 Call feature 1 Reconnect alarm 2 Quality alarm 3 Minute reminder 4 Prefix dial 5 International dial 1 Auto assist setting 2 IDD prefix setting 6 Close setting Appendix Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference No record No record No record Last call, Received calls, Dialed calls, All calls (00:00:00) Auto answering Delayed time
(SEC) (0 - 120) ON/OFF 10 Accept/Reject/Reject all calls/Memory reject call Press send key/Open flip/Press any key High alarm/Low alarm/No alarm High alarm/Low alarm/No alarm ON/OFF PREFIX 1 PREFIX 2~3 009130010 Not registered Auto/OFF IDD prefix name IDD prefix code End the call/Continue (Mute) WORLDCALL 009130010 P88 P89 P91 P92 P93 A p p e n d x i 249 Appendix Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference 3 Video-phone 1 Video-phone settings 2 Image settings 1 Substitutive image 2 Response hold image 3 On-hold image 4 Date & Time 1 Set time 2 Set date A p p e n d x i 250 VoiceCall AutoSwitch Display setting Sub screen Send camera image Sending img. quality Display light Hands_free V.phone Image Image list Image Image list Image Image list Set time Time format Hour indication Set date Date format ON/OFF Both/Other/Me Me/Other ON/OFF Prefer image quality/Normal/Prefer motion quality Always on/Terminal setting ON/OFF Default image/Selected image Not setting Default image/Selected image Not setting Default image/Selected image Not setting 00 : 00 : 00 12-hour/24-hour OFF 2006.01.01 DD/MM/YYYY / MM/DD/YYYY /
YYYY/MM/DD P93 P94 P95 P96 Menu Item 3 Daylight saving 5 Network 1 Network selection 2 Network mode 3 Preferred lists 4 Network name display 6 Host selection 7 Security 1 All lock 2 PIN code request 1 3 Change password 1 PIN1 code 1 2 PIN2 code 1 3 Security code 8 9 Others 2 1 Memory status 1 Data box 2 Personal info. 3 UIM memory Appendix Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference ON/OFF Auto/Manual Auto/WCDMA only/GSM only Depending on user's setting Display on/Display off i - mode Power on/Immediate/None ON/OFF 0000 0000 0000
/English P96 P97 P98 P99 P100 P101 A p p e n d x i Next Page 251 Appendix Menu Item 2 Reset settings 1 Clear memory 2 Default settings 3 SMS center 4 Reset holiday Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase) Reference 1 Data box 2 Personal info. SMSC Address DoCoMo/Others 81903101652 P101 P102 1: Settings of UIM takes precedence. 2: The setting is registered in FOMA phone and UIM, but if each setting is different, the setting of UIM takes precedence. A p p e n d x i 252 Default List of the Submenu/Function Menu Items Video-phone talking screen > P59 Items / Function Name Setting Items Appendix Camera settings
(Zoom)
(Brightness)
(Night mode) Video phone settings Display setting Sub screen Display light Sending img. Quality Phonebook list screen >P67 Items / Function Name Search phonebook X1/X2 High/Medium/Low ON/OFF Both/Other/Me Me/Other Always on/Terminal setting Normal/Prefer motion quality/Prefer image quality Setting Items Show all data/Group search/Reading search/Memory No. search/Phone No. search/Domain search Display image ON/OFF A p p e n d x i Next page 253 Appendix Still Image Finder Stand-by display >P112 Submenu Items Setting Items
(Upside down)
(Size)
(Quality)
(Multishot)
(Zoom)
(Brightness)
(White balance)
(Night mode)
(Frame shot)
(Auto timer)
(Effect)
(File size restriction) Upside down 1280X1024/640X480/352X288/320X240/176X220/176X144/128X96/
Phonebook Super fine/Fine/Normal OFF/3/6/9 Auto/Daylight/Cloudy/Incandescent/Fluorescent ON/OFF Choose frame/No frame None/3 sec./5 sec./10 sec. None/Black & White/Sepia/Negative No restriction/100KB/9KB 254 Still Image Display (After taking a multishot) > P113 Submenu Item Slide show settings View as Time interval (secs) Sort by View by Moving Image Display > P116 Submenu Item
(Upside down)
(Quality)
(Zoom)
(Brightness)
(White balance)
(Night mode)
(Effect)
(Recording time)
(Type) Setting Items Normal screen/Full screen 1 ~ 9 sec (s) (1) Name/Date/Type Simple list/Detailed list/Grid Setting Items Upside down Super fine/Fine/Normal Auto/Daylight/ Cloudy/Incandescent/Fluorescent ON/OFF None/Black & White/Negative/Sepia 30 secs/1 min/2 mins/5 mins/30 mins/Mail attach Sound+Video/Video only/Sound only Appendix Next page 255 Appendix MessageR/F list screen >P126 Items / Function Name Sort Filter Received mail list screen >P141 Items / Function Name Sort Filter Sent mail list screen >P146 Setting Items Subject(asc.)/Subject(desc.)/Date(asc.)/Date(desc.) All/Unread/Read/Protected/Not protected/Pasted/Attached Setting Items Subject(asc.)/Subject(desc.)/Address(asc.)/Address(desc.)/Date(asc.)/
Date(desc.) All/Unread/Read/Protected/Not protected/Pasted/Attached/i-mode mail/
SMS/SMS report Items / Function Name Setting Items Subject(asc.)/Subject(desc.)/Address(asc.)/Address(desc.)/Date(asc.)/
Date(desc.) All/Protected/Not protected/Attached/i-mode mail/SMS Sort Filter A p p e n d x i 256 Unsent mail list screen > P148 Submenu Item Sort Filter Software list screen >P161 Submenu Item Sort Appendix Setting Items Subject (asc.)/Subject (desc.)/Address (asc.)/Address (desc.)/Date (asc.)/
Date (desc.) All/Attached/i-mode mail/SMS Setting Items Name (asc.)/Name (desc.)/Exec time (asc.)/Exec time (desc.)/
Create time (asc.)/Create time (desc.)/S/W size (asc.)/S/W size (desc.)/
Exec count (asc.)/Exec count (desc.) Network setting i-appli To Icon info setting Autostart setting Show desc setting Yes/No/Check every start Yes/No Yes/No Set/Not set Show/Don't show A p p e n d x i Next page 257 Appendix Still image saving screen >P114/moving image saving screen >P117/Image folder list screen >P168/Image file list screen >P168/Image display screen >P170 Submenu Item Setting Items Sort by View by Slide show settings Settings Name/Date/Type Simple list/Detailed list/Grid View as Time interval (secs) Normal screen/Full screen 1 sec ~ 9 secs (1 sec) Image edit screen >P171 Submenu Item Text Frame Element Resizing Insert Clipping Effect A p p e n d x i 258 640x480/320x240/160x120/Wallpaper size/Phonebook size/Sub display size Setting Items
> Text focus (P251)
> Frame (P250)
> Stamp (P251) 1280X960/640X480/320X240/160X120/Wallpaper size/Phonebook size User-defined size Black & White/Sepia/Negative/Black & White negative/Color balance/Contrast/
Sharpness/Softness/Mosaic Blur Moving image folder list screen >P174/i-motion file list screen >P174/Moving image playback screen >P175 Submenu Item Setting Items Appendix Sort by View by Player settings Visual effect Player skin (Color) Volume Name/Date/Type Simple list/Detailed list/Grid Spectrum analy/Dancing notes Pink/Blue/Violet OFF~Level 7 (Level3) Melody folder list screen >P177/Melody file list screen >P177/Melody playback screen >P177 Submenu Item Setting Items Sort by View by Set repeat Player setting Visual effect Player skin Volume Name/Date/Type Simple list/Detailed list/Grid None/Current file/All files/Shuffle Spectrum analy/Dancing notes Pink/Blue/Violet OFF~Level 7 (Level3) A p p e n d x i 259 Appendix In Stand-by mode a Main display Pre-installed data Ceramic.jpg Green tea.jpg Sakura.jpg Vivid blue.jpg Vivid red.jpg Waterdrop.jpg a Sub-display Sub_ceramic.jpg Sub_green tea.jpg Sub_sakura.jpg Sub_vivid blue.jpg Sub_vivid red.jpg Sub_waterdrop.jpg A p p e n d x i 260 The screen for receiving/making a call a Main display Appendix Ceramic_in_calling.gif Ceramic_out_calling.gif Green_in_calling.gif Green_out_calling.gif Incoming_call.gif Outgoing_call.gif Sakura_in_calling.gif Sakura_out_calling.gif Waterdrop_in_calling.gif Waterdrop_out_calling.gif a Sub display Sub_incoming.gif Sub_outgoing.gif A p p e n d x i 261 Appendix Frame The frame including of multiple file sizes can be different to view depending on file size. The frames enclosed in the lines below can be selected by Frame Shot in Using the Submenus of the Still Image Finder Stand-by Screen (P112). The displayed frame differs depending on the size of the image to be edited. A p p e n d x i 262 Element Appearances may differ depending on file size. Text focus i-motion DiMAGIC eco-motion.3gp Appendix Information i-motions on the left are 3D-sound-supported i-motions, but as this FOMA phone does not support 3D-sound, they are not played with 3D-sound. List of melody Melody title Melody title Air on The G String.mid Alarm01 ~ Alarm03.mid An der schonen blauen donau.mid Beautiful Life.mid Blues Mania.mid Brandenburg Concertos.mid Cave No.31.mid Czardas.mid Dark Valley.mid Driving Bayside.mid Energetic Today.mid Funny Funky.mid Green Park.mid Happy Birthday to you.mid Hunter G.mid The copyright of each melody belongs to LG electronic If I Could.mid Jasmine.mid Jingle Bell.mid Menueti.mid Message01 ~ Message12.mid Moonlight.mid Musette.mid Play Dominoes.mid Ring01 ~ Ring05.mid Secrect Of Nature.mid Swan Lake.mid Touch Of Light.mid Wedding Martch.mid Welcome My Friend.mid Winter.mid Japan, Inc. A p p e n d x i 263 Appendix a Full-pitch symbol Symbol/Special Character List Full symbol (1/8) Full symbol (2/8) Full symbol (3/8) Full symbol (4/8) Full symbol (5/8) Full symbol (6/8) Full symbol (7/8) Full symbol (8/8) Information Special Characters Special characters may not be correctly displayed if they are sent to mobile phones or personal computers that do not support i-mode mail. A p p e n d x i 264 Appendix a Half-pitch symbol Half symbol Pictograph List a Pictograph1 Pictograph and Emoticon List Pictograph1 (1/6) Pictograph1 (2/6) Pictograph1 (3/6) Pictograph1 (4/6) a Pictograph2 Pictograph1 (5/6) Pictograph1 (6/6) A p p e n d x i Next page 265 Appendix Emoticon List Category Happy Expressions Category Angry Expressions Category Embarrass Expressions Sweat Greeting Surprise Other Cry Chill Information For the method of entering pictographs and emoticons, see Switching Pictograph/Symbol/Emoticon (P217). A p p e n d x i 266 Appendix Category Internet folder Phrase Common Phrase List Phrase Category Greeting folder Business folder Greeting folder Private folder A p p e n d x i 267 Appendix Category Private folder Reply folder Category Pictograph idiom folder Phrase
(Hello)
(Waiting a call)
(Happy)
(Angry) Original folder You can enter your own phrase from 1 to 0.
(Christmas) Pictograph idiom folder
(Glad)
(OK) A p p e n d x i 268
(Lovely)
(Return) Appendix Kuten Code List To enter a Kuten Code, first enter the 3-digit number for Kuten digits 1 to 3 and enter the 1-digit number for Kuten digit 4 Some characters in Kuten Code List may appear different from those on the display. Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 A p p e n d x i 269 Appendix Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 A p p e n d x i 270
1 2 | Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.31 MiB |
Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Appendix A p p e n d x i Next Page 271 Appendix Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 A p p e n d x i 272 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Appendix A p p e n d x i Next Page 273 Appendix Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 A p p e n d x i 274 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Appendix A p p e n d x i Next Page 275 Appendix Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 A p p e n d x i 276 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 1 to 3 Kuten digit 4 Appendix A p p e n d x i 277 Appendix List of city in World time Country name City name Country name City name Country name City name Kabul Buenos Aires Canberra Sydney Vienna Dhaka Azores Brussels Rio de Janeiro Montreal Prague Copenhagen Cairo Helsinki Paris Berlin Athens Budapest New Delhi Jakarta Tehran Dublin Rome Tokyo Kuwait Beirut Mexico City Amsterdam Auckland Beijing Hong Kong Manila Lisbon Moscow Iran Ireland Italy Japan Kuwait Lebanon Mexico Netherlands New Zealand People's Republic of China Philippines Portugal Russia Republic of Korea Seoul Saudi Arabia Jedda Singapore Singapore Spain Madrid Colombo Sri Lanka Sweden Stockholm Taiwan Thailand UAE UK USA Venezuela Viet Nam Taipei Bangkok Abu Dhabi London Anchorage Boston Chicago Dallas Denver Detroit Guam Honolulu Los Angeles New York Seattle Washington D.C. Caracas Hanoi Afghanistan Aregentina Australia Austria Bangladesh Belgium Brazil Canada Czech Denmark Egypt Finland France Germany Greece Hungary India Indonesia 278 A p p e n d x i Multiaccess Combination Patterns You can simultaneously use a voice call and packet transmission (i-mode, i-mode mail, etc.) as well as SMS with the multiaccessing function on the FOMA phone. The available combinations of operations for the multiaccessing function are shown below:
Appendix Video-phone Voice call Outgoing Incoming Outgoing Incoming i-appli i-mode i-mode mail Receiving Sending SMS Packet transmission Send Receive Sending Transmission Added Current Transmission During a call During a Video-phone call While using i-appli During i-mode During a packet transmission with PC connection O : Available x : Not available : The combination is functionally not possible. 1: If you have signed up for Call Waiting Service, you can make another voice call with the current voice call put on hold. 2: If you have signed up for Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service, and you have not yet activated either service, you can answer another incoming call after ending the current transmission. 3: You can check the missed call after ending a call. 4: You cannot use this menu during communicating i-appli. 5: The message will be stored in i-mode center with a mark on upper of screen.
(The mark is not displayed on the top of the screen during a packet transmission connecting with a personal computer.) 6: You cannot receive message while downloading. 7: You can receive SMS after ending current transmission. 8: You cannot activate i-appli which needs data communication while transmitting by packet. 9: If i-appli runs without connecting the network, the packet transmission cannot be activated. 10: You can activate i-appli only if you call from site of i-mode. 11: You can send i-mode mail or i-appli if you compose the mail from the submenus of i-mode browser. You can insert the displayed site or URL into the body of mail. A p p e n d x i 279 Appendix Multitask Combination Patterns Icon Description Icon Description You can run multiple functions simultaneously and use them switching displays with the Multitask function. Using Multitask 1. While running each function, N DoCoMo Ichiro DoCoMo Saburo DoCoMo Jiro DoCoMo Taro Search phonebook 1/4 Phonebook Select You can confirm the functions running. You can switch functions by selecting the icon. Icon Description Icon Description Voice call function running Mail function running i-mode function running i-appli function running Phonebook function 1 running Data box function running (The player is playing back) Calculator function running Own number is displayed Setting the network/
Displaying the history of recent calls Tool function running 4 Setting the sound function A p p e n d x i
2) 280 Multimedia function running Scheduler function running Setting the display menu Setting the setting menu 1: Own number function is not included. 2: If you switch i-mode/ i-appli, the play is ended, and then is displayed. 3: Schedule function is not included. 4: Custom menu, Infrared. 2. Select
] C ] Select from the following new functions ] C Call The Phone Number entry screen appears. > P48 Mail The Mail menu appears. > P137 i-mode The i-mode menu appears. > P119 i-appli The Software List screen appears. > P159 Search phonebook The Phonebook Search screen appears. > P66 Melody The Melody Folder List screen appears. > P176 Camera-mode The Still Image Finder screen appears. > P110 Scheduler The Monthly Schedule screen appears. > P191 Calculator The Calculator screen appears. > P184 Own number Own number is displayed. > P72 A few functions are not selected depending on activating the task.
> P282 Information To bring up the Task Menu display from Stand-by screen, press and hold N for 1 or more seconds. When you activate multitask function, the submenus can be used. It may be a few cases that you cannot use Search phonebook depending on the memory status of FOMA handset. Ending the task/ Going back to previous task 1. Q/P You can terminate the running function. When an application is running or i-mode is being connected, terminate it by pressing P. Appendix A p p e n d x i 281 Appendix Combination of Functions You may not be able to select some items on the Task Menu display depending on the added function. The combinations of active functions and added functions performable from the Task Menu are as follows:
Voice call Mail i-mode i-appi Phonebook search Task menu item Active function During a Voice call A function in the Mail menu running A function in the i-mode menu running A function in the i-appli menu running A function in a menu other than the Mail/i-mode/i-appli menu running Own number displayed O : Available x : Not available 1: You cannot use this menu when activating the menu from phonebook. You cannot use new phonebook function. 2: You cannot use this menu when using phonebook function. 3: You cannot use this menu when activating function from Received calls / Dialed calls / Phonebook. While using or running the following functions, pressing N does not work:
A p p e n d x i On displaying the warning message or info message / During a voice call / video-phone call / while making / receiving a call During a video-phone call During data transmission with a personal computer connected While recording moving image While copying data / moving data / deleting all data / downloading data While exchanging a data via infrared 282 Task menu item Active function During a Voice call A function in the Mail menu running A function in the i-mode menu running A function in the i-appli menu running A function in a menu other than the Mail/i-mode/i-appli menu running Own number displayed Melody Camera Schedule Calculator Own number Appendix A p p e n d x i 283 Appendix Service Available with FOMA Phones Available services Collect call (Calls charged to the receiver) Directory assistance for ordinary phones and DoCoMo mobile phones (Charges apply) (Unlisted phone numbers cannot be given.) Phone number
(No prefix) 106
(No prefix) 104 Time information (Charges apply) Weather forecast (Charges apply) Telegrams (Charges apply) 8 a.m. to 10 p.m.
(No prefix) 115
(No prefix) 117 Area code + 177
(No prefix) 110 Emergency calls to police Emergency calls to fire station and ambulance (No prefix) 119
(No prefix) 118
(No prefix) 171 Disaster messaging service (Charges apply) Emergency calls for accidents at sea Information When making a collect call (106), the recipient is charged call fee and a handling fee of 90 (94.5 including tax) for each a call. (As of October, 2006) When using the Directory Assistance Service (104), you are charged a guidance fee of 100 (105 including tax) plus a call fee. For whom having weak eyesight or handicapped arms, the guidance is available charge free. For more details, dial 116 (NTT inquiry counter) from ordinary phones. (As of October, 2006) A p p e n d x i 284 When you dial 110/119/118 from the FOMA phone, you cannot be located. Tell the staff at the police/fire station that you are calling from a mobile phone and then notify your phone number and a correct description of your current location so that they can call you back to confirm. Furthermore, remain still while talking to prevent your call from being disconnected. Do not turn off the power immediately after the call, but instead make sure that your phone can receive calls for at least 10 minutes. You may not be connected to regional police/fire station depending on the area from where you call. If this happens, use payphones or ordinary phones. If you use Call Forwarding Service for the ordinary phone and specify a mobile phone or automobile phone
(mobile phone) as the forwarding destination, callers may hear ringing tone even when the mobile phone is busy, out of the service area, or the power is turned off depending on the settings of the ordinary phone/mobile phone. Note that the FOMA phone is not available to 116 (NTT inquiry counter), Dial Q2, Message Dial, and credit call services. (You can use auto credit call to the FOMA phone from ordinary phones or payphones.) Appendix Introduction of Data Link FOMA L602i Data Link is the program for data such as phonebook, bookmark, contents exchange or transmission using FOMA phone to a personal computer via connecting the FOMA USB cable (option). You can edit and save the data using personal computer. LG Electronics Japan For details of installation, environments, operation, and limit, refer to web page or Installation guide and Help file of Data Link program. jp.wowlg.com a OS Windows2000, WindowsXP (Japanese version) PC/AT transmission operator supported these OS a Warranty Limitation LG Electronics Japan, Inc. shall undertake the flaw warranty of this software, and no other responsibility of a qualification. Moreover, any problems concerning Data Link software and related data shall be solved by responsibility and expense of an user. FOMA Data Link
<Customer Service of LG Electronics Japan Inc.>
a Phone number 0120-813-023 Can be called from mobile phone or PHS 03-5675-7323 Please confirm the phone number before you dial. a Business hours 10:00 a.m. ~ 6:00 p.m.
(Except for Saturday, Sunday and Holiday) Information While synchronizing Data link, you cannot use other functions. You can synchronize Data link only from Stand-by screen. A p p e n d x i 285 Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Check point The FOMA phone cannot be turned on.
(Cannot be used) Make sure the battery pack is attached to the FOMA phone correctly. Make sure the battery is fully charged. Cannot operate by pressing buttons. Turn off the power once and back on, or reinstall the battery pack. Cannot be charged. Make sure the battery pack is attached to the phone Reference P39 P42 P39, 44 P39 P40 P31 P29, 109 correctly. Make sure that the charging is performed in a correct way. You may be out of the service area or receiving weak radio waves. Check the rotation direction of the camera. This may be because All Lock is activated. This may be because the call/mail from a party whose ring tone/mail ring tone is set by Utilities per mail address. This may be because the call/mail from a party stored in a group and set with a ring tone/mail ring tone in Group Setting. Make sure the same UIM that was attached when you downloaded images or melodies is inserted. P99 P65 P71 P38 appears and a busy tone sounds when making a call. Camera images are dark showing nothing when using the camera/video camera, or making a video-phone call.
"All lock" is displayed on the Stand-by display. Different ring tones sound for incoming calls/incoming mails. Images or melodies selected return to default. A p p e n d x i 286 a When using at overseas Problem Check point stays displayed, and the International Roaming Service cannot be used. Cannot use Video-phone call/SMS/i-mode/Packet transmission. Make sure the phone is in the international roaming service area and is not receiving weak radio waves. Check the Network Services User's Guide (Chapter of International Service) or WORLD WING's web page to see whether the service area or the carrier can be used with your phone. Change the Network mode to Auto or to the network supporting the service. Check the Network Services User's Guide (Chapter of International Service) or WORLD WING's web page to see whether the service area or the carrier can be used with your phone. Change the 3G/GSM/GPRS to Auto or to the network supporting the service. Cannot receive Voice call or Video-phone call. Make sure Barring All Incoming when roam is not set to restrict incoming calls. Remains after returned from overseas. Make sure Network mode is not set to GSM only. Appendix Reference P224 P97 P97 P207 P97 A p p e n d x i Next page 287 Appendix Message Invalid UIM requested software can't start Invalid UIM requested service not available. Invalid UIM cannot send Invalid UIM, incorrect display Error Messages Description Reference Cannot auto start i-appli software because of the UIM restrictions. Insert the UIM which was inserted when the file was obtained and try again. Cannot send mail because of the UIM restrictions. Insert the UIM which was inserted when the mail was created and try again. Cannot operate because of the UIM restrictions. Insert the UIM which was inserted when the file was obtained and try again. Cannot display because of the UIM restrictions. Insert the UIM which was inserted when the mail was created and try again. Insert FOMA card(UIM) / Insert UIM No UIM is inserted. Insert it and try again. Invalid UIM requested software can't start Cannot start i-appli software because of the UIM restrictions. Insert the UIM which was inserted when the file was obtained and try again. Could not check new message Was not able to check new message successfully. i-mode mail service is busy. Please try again later (555) The line facility has trouble or line is very busy. Try again later. A p p e n d x i 288 Appendix Description Reference Message Invalid PUK1 Remaining: X Invalid PIN1 Remaining: X Invalid PIN1 (PIN2) Remaning:X Invalid PIN1 (PIN2) Remaning:X Please check SMS Center settings The entered PIN1 unblock code is wrong. Enter the correct one. The entered PIN1code is wrong. Enter the correct one. If you enter wrong PIN1/ PIN2 code 3 times in a row, PIN is locked. To unlock it, enter PIN unlock code. If you enter wrong PIN1/ PIN2 code 3 times in a row, PIN is locked. To unlock it, enter PIN unlock code. The setting of the SMS center is wrong. Make the settings correctly and try again. SSL session cannot be established. Connection was not established to the site which is supporting SSL Root certificate is not valid. Please set To type receiver There is data that can't register to UIM URL is too long to register URL is too long to display communication. Try again. The SSL certificate for that server is set to "Invalid" in the "Certificate"
setting. Change the setting to "Valid" and try again. The mail address (To-type) is not entered. Perform a transfer after entering it. When you copy the entry of phonebook from handset to UIM, the character may be entered over the limit or entered the item that cannot be registered. The URL for the site is too long, so it cannot be registered. The URL for the site is too long, so it cannot be displayed. P105 P105 P105 P105 P102 P128 P149 A p p e n d x i Next Page 289 Appendix Message Invalid URL No URL history 9K size cannot be used There is no empty memory. Address is not valid (451) Please input address Upgrade was terminated. No empty memory Cannot start application Incorrect password Can't copy some data Continue?
Not moved error Cannot rename Error in renaming A p p e n d x i 290 Description Reference The URL is not entered correctly. Enter it correctly and try again. URL history is not recorded.
"Multi shot" or "Frame shot" cannot be set because "File size restriction"
is set to "9KB". When you want to set "Multi shot" or "Frame shot", set
"File size restriction" to "No restriction". Since the entered memory number was already in use, the phonebook entry cannot be saved. Enter a different memory number. SMS was not able to be sent since the address is wrong. Perform the operation after entering a correct address. No address is entered. Perform a transmission after entering an address. An error occurred, and upgrade was terminated. An error occurred so you cannot create the animation. An error occurred so the i-mode function could not be started. The Terminal Security Code is wrong. Enter the correct Terminal Security Code. The data which cannot be copied is included. If you want to copy in this situation, select Yes. An error occurred so the file could not be moved. An error occurred, so the operation of i-appli has been terminated. An error occured so you cannot change the name. P113 P149 P104 Appendix Description Reference Message No response (408) No response from the site or the Internet web page, so could not connect. Try again. Same URL already stored. Overwrite? The same URL is already registered. Select "Yes" to overwrite. Same address is entered. Send?
Exist same file Exist same file Cannot add same desktop icon All lock MessageF (free) service unavailable while abroad. Please make sure the Center Inquiry functions on your mobile phone, does not check for MessageF, when making inquires to the i-mode center(556) Not available if size is restricted The same address is entered. Select "Yes" to delete and send. The same file name exists. Change the file name to save. The same folder name exists. Change the folder name. You cannot copy the file in the same folder. Select the other folder, and then I [Add]. All lock is set. After releasing the lock, try it again. You cannot request MessageF overseas. Exclude "MessageF" from
"Request i-mode" items to be used overseas. You cannot set "Setting saved quality" if you set "File size restriction" to other than "No restriction". Before you set it, set "File size restriction" to
"No restriction". Error in image. Does not work correctly Cannot save image The memory space is not enough or an error occurred, so it does not run correctly. An error occurred, so the image cannot be saved. P99 P129, 155 P112 A p p e n d x i Next Page 291 Appendix Message Screen memos is full. Screen memos is full. Select item to delete Failed to load screen memo No screen memos Cannot add screen memo Unable to view file. Access to URL is limited (491) Failed to launch. Out of service area Terminal and UIM ID will be sent Description The screen memos are saved up to the maximum. By pressing "Yes", you can delete unnecessary screen memos. The screen memos are saved up to the maximum so that it cannot save any more. Select "Yes" and delete unnecessary screen memos. Failed to read the screen memo so that it cannot be displayed. No screen memos are saved. An error occurred, so the screen memo could not be saved. The maximum number of accessible times exceeded, so could not be displayed. Failed to start software because of an error. You are either out of the service area or where radio waves are not received. Move to a place where is displayed. This is displayed when IP (Information Service Provider) needs to identify a customer with "Serial number of your mobile phone/UIM". "Serial number of your mobile phone/UIM" is sent to IP over the Internet, so it could be perceived by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age and gender are not notified to the IP (Information Service Provider) or others by this operation. Select "Yes" to connect. Already downloaded by different UIM. Overwrite?
Already the same i-appli downloaded with a different UIM exists. Select
"Yes" to overwrite. A p p e n d x i Reference P122 292 Appendix Message This card cannot be recognized Cannot zoom in this image size Certificate is rejected (tampered) This site is not certified. Do you connect?
This certificate has expired. Do you connect?
Root certificate has expired. Do you connect?
This certificate is not valid for this URL Do you connect?
Description The UIM cannot be recognized, or an invalid UIM is inserted. Either reinsert the UIM or insert a valid UIM and try the operation again. Since the "Size" is set to "1280x1024", zoom does not work. Set the
"Size" to "640x480" or smaller to use the zoom. Could not connect since an altered SSL certificate was received. The SSL certificate which is not supported has been received. Select
"Yes" to connect. You have connected to a site supporting SSL communication without your clock being set. Please perform "set time". An expired or premature SSL certificate is received. Select "Yes" to connect. The SSL certificate in the FOMA phone has expired. Select "Yes" to connect. You have connected to a site supporting SSL communication without your clock being set. Please perform "Set time". A request to send a client certificate occurred while connecting to a site supporting SSL communication. Select "Yes" to connect. When the CN of SSL certificate does not match, this error message will be displayed. Select "Yes" to connect. Reference P37 P111 P95 A p p e n d x i Next Page 293 Appendix Message Terminal and UIM ID will be sent. This software will use saved data. Description Reference This is displayed at download for an IP (Information Service Provider) to identify a customer and judge whether it can be used with the mobile phone.
"Serial number of your mobile phone/UIM" is sent to IP over the Internet, so it could be perceived by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age and gender are not notified to the IP (Information Service Provider) or others by this operation. Select "Yes" to connect. The registered data (such as phonebook, bookmark or schedule) saved in your mobile phone is used at download. Some media is used only with-in your phone. Since the file protected with copyright protection technology is included, it cannot be transmitted. This data cannot be moved This data cannot be copied The data may not be replayed This data cannot be set This data cannot be sent This data cannot be edited The data cannot be saved. The file cannot be moved since it is protected with copyright protection technology. The file cannot be copied since it is protected with copyright protection technology. Since downloaded data is not valid, it may not be able to be played. Cannot be set since it is protected with copyright protection technology. Cannot be sent since it is protected with copyright protection technology. Cannot be edited since it is protected with copyright protection technology. The data from a site cannot be saved since the data is invalid. A p p e n d x i 294 Message Description The data cannot be saved. Download?
Please set the clock to obtain data Cannot acquire this data because the clock is not set. Perform this You cannot save the data even though you obtain it because the data cannot be saved. Select "Yes" to obtain it. operation after setting the clock. This file cannot be set as a wallpaper. This file cannot be set as a wallpaper Failed copy. Cannot add folder Too many items are protected Unable to connect to server. Service is not provided Connection failed Not supported image size This motion is not complete This data can no longer be replayed Delete?
Failed to copy the phone number and the mail address since an error occurred in the data of the phone number and the mail address while copying the phonebook. The maximum number of folders that can be created has been reached, so cannot create any more. Delete unnecessary folders and try again. The maximum number of files that can be protected has been reached so cannot protect any more. Release protection for other files and try again. Connection to the server failed for some reason. Try again The i-mode service is not subscribed to, so the service cannot be used. Please subscribe to the service. Cannot send since you are in an area where SMS service is not provided. You cannot insert Frame since the sizes are 1280X1024, 640X480 and Phonebook. Cannot save the data since the data was not completely acquired. An i-motion movie with playable frequency reached is selected. Select "Yes" to delete it. Appendix Reference P95 A p p e n d x i Next Page 295 Appendix Message Replay period has expired Delete?
Replay period has not yet started Cannot obtain in error to play back Unable to obtain data due to replay restriction data error Can't play Could not play Size of this page is not supported Size of this page is not supported Unable to download. Data exceeds maximum size. (452) URL address changed. (301) Connection failed (XXX) File with copyright is deleted Could not delete Page is not found. (404) A p p e n d x i 296 Description Reference An i-motion movie with expired replay period is selected. Select "Yes" to delete it. You are selecting an i-motion movie whose playable date has not yet come. Check the playable date. There is an error in the playback control in i-motion, so cannot be acquired. There is an error in the playback restriction data for i-motion, so cannot be acquired. An error occurred, so cannot be played back. An error occurred, so could not be played back. The maximum size of data exceeded, so could not be downloaded successfully. The size of data receiving exceeded the maximum size, so could not be received. The site or Internet web page is automatically transferring the URL or the URL has been changed. If this is registered in the bookmark or Home, reregister it. Could not connect to the site for some reasons. Try again. A 3-digit number is displayed in (XXX). A file prohibited to be output from the FOMA phone is attached to the i-mode mail you are sending. Failed to delete because an error occurred. The site was not found. The site may not exist. Appendix Message No content is available. (204) No requested software No requested software. End?
Run selected software?
Requested software unavailable Unable to retrieve the requested URL (504) No Requested File (492) cannot register anymore Please wait Low battery Cannot receive message No messages No Certificates Inbox message is full Description Reference There is no data to display at the connected site. There was no i-appli to start from the site or mail. There was no i-appli to start from the site or mail. The URL to activate i-appi is activated. If you activate it, select Yes. Could not start an i-appli from the site or mail. Could not connect to the specified site for some reason. Try again. The selected file does not exist in the FOMA phone. All software programs that can be auto started have already been set up, so you cannot set up any more. The line facility has trouble or the line is very busy. Try again later. The battery level is too low to activate the function. After charging it, try again. Failed to obtain mail. The received mail has not been saved. SSL certificate has not been saved. Received mail is saved up to the maximum number or the memory space for received mails is already full, and no more can be saved. Delete unnecessary received mails. P40 P141 A p p e n d x i Next Page 297 Appendix Message Schedule is full Streaming play not supported Invalid data. Connection cannot be established (400) Connection interrupted Connection failed Connection failed Connection failed (562) SSL session failed. Time out Network unavailable Sent message is full A p p e n d x i 298 Description The schedule is set up to maximum, and no more can be set. Delete unnecessary schedule. You cannot play the file because i-motion of streaming type is not supported. Could not access i-mode for some reasons. A 3-digit number is displayed in (XXX). The line is busy or a transmission error occurred, so connection was interrupted. Try again later. An error occurred during a download. Select Retry to reconnect. Radio waves are weak, so cannot connect. Move to a place where radio waves are strong enough and try again. Could not connect because of network trouble. Wait a while and try again. Cannot connect because of the error in the server's authentication. Could not connect within the time set at Connection Timeout. Change the setting or try the operation again. You are either out of the service area or where radio waves are not received; so you cannot set the network service because the network is not connected. Move to a place where radio waves can be reached. Sent mails was saved up to the maximum number, and no more mail can be saved. Delete unnecessary saved mail. Reference P192, 193 P129 P146 Message Sending error Address is not valid (451) Transmission failed Transmission failed (XXX) Server is full (551) No messages Software updated Application(s) exist. Folder can't be deleted. The software contains an error. This software contains an error. Unable to download. Memory full. Overwrite existing software?
This software is not supported by this phone. Installation cancelled Already downloaded. i-mode mail service is busy. Please try again later(553) Appendix Description Reference A sending error occurred. Could not send the message correctly. Check the address and send again. The mail could not be sent correctly. A 3-digit number is displayed in (XXX). The recipient's mail is full. Sent mail has not been saved. The S/W is not updated so you cannot activate the function. Software is saved in the folder so the folder cannot be deleted. Delete the software and try again. There is an error in the software, so the folder download and version upgrade cannot be performed. There is an error in the software, so download and version upgrade cannot be performed. Memory for storing software is not enough, so no more can be saved. Delete unnecessary software. The software to download or to update the version is not compatible with this FOMA phone. An error occurred, so downloading was interrupted. The same version of the software has already been downloaded. The line is very busy. Try again later. P162 P162 A p p e n d x i Next Page 299 Appendix Message Invalid speed dial Security code is wrong Not allowed Call rejected Interrupted Connection interrupted. Retry?
Interrupted A p p e n d x i This data cannot be sent Begin data exchange?
Battery low 300 Description Reference No phonebook entry with a memory number corresponding to the number entered on the Phonebook Entry display has been registered. The Terminal Security Code is wrong. Enter the correct Terminal Security Code. Could not make a phone call since the connection to the network failed. Try making the call again. Rejected a call when incoming call from the other party not registered in phonebook. To receive a call, set Memory reject call to Permit. Rejected a call from the other party registered Reject on list. Rejected a call when Reject all calls sets to Disconnect call. The i-mode inquiry was suspended for some reason. Try the operation again. An error occurred during Infrared communication, so transmission has been suspended. Select "Yes" to retry the connection. An error occurred during Infrared communication, so Infrared reception has been suspended. The file cannot be sent from the FOMA phone, so you cannot send a mail attaching the file. The message to activate infrared function is displayed. Select Yes to activate this function. The battery level is low. Perform the operation after charging the battery. P64 P104 P90 P90 P90 P182 P40 Message Data full Description Data is stored to the maximum, so cannot save any more. Delete unnecessary data. Appendix Reference P141, 162, 168, 169, 175 Invalid data Receiving canceled Low battery Exit camera-mode Low battery Cannot start camera-
mode Attached file size is over. Cannot attach more than file Delete attached file Delete end the phone number is too long Failed to copy the phone number An invalid data has been downloaded. Could not obtain because of invalid data. Because the battery level is low, the camera is terminated. Try again after charging the battery. The remaining battery level is getting low. Perform the operation after charging the battery. The file size of the message you attempt to send exceeds the maximum size. No attachable files have been saved. The file was deleted because there was an attachment with UIM restrictions. The number of digits of the phone number entered in the address of SMS message by looking up the phonebook exceeds the maximum number of characters that can be entered. The phone number failed to be copied because there was an error in the data of the phone number while it was copied to the phonebook. Registration num is over Can't copy The phone book memory in the UIM is full, so the phone book cannot be Memory is full copied. Try again after deleting unnecessary phonebook. Since the memory of the selected storage place is full, the phone book cannot be stored. Perform the operation after deleting unnecessary phonebook entries. P40 P40 P151 P68 P68 A p p e n d x i Next Page 301 Appendix Message Registration is in progress (554) Not registered Cancel and discard work in progress?
Enter name. Too much data was entered Input error (205) Authentication type is not supported(401) Invalid Auth. password wrong. Retry?
Authentication canceled (XXX) Enter correct Network Security Code No network found No response from network. Activate manually?
302 A p p e n d x i Description Reference Cannot operate because the user is being registered. Wait a while and try again. An error occurred so the data cannot be registered. You are about to terminate the edited content without saving. Select "Yes" to terminate the content without saving. The name of the phonebook is not entered. Save after entering a name. Too many characters have been entered in the text box or URL, so it cannot be sent. Reduce the number of characters to send. The data (such as text) entered and transmitted from a site are wrong. Check the entered contents and try again. Cannot connect because the authentication type is not supported. An error occurred so you cannot register it. The authentication password entered is incorrect. Select Yes to continue. This will be displayed when Cancel is selected from the authentication screen. A 3-digit number is displayed in (XXX). The Network Security Code is wrong. Enter the correct Network Security Code. You cannot set the network service because the network is not connected. Please wait a while and try again. Cannot search for the network automatically.To search manually, select "Yes". P64 P184 P104 P96 Appendix Message Password is not correct. Password is not correct. (401) Select ON for caller ID notification File error Invalid File Invalid File (493) The file is not supported. Invalid data File size is too big Image with digital right is included File is deleted Enter file name Can't attach file Cannot read file Unknown file format Can't create folder. Folder already exists. The entered password is wrong. Enter the correct password. Description Cannot notify the phone number. After setting on in caller ID notification, try again. Because the file has an error, it cannot be saved. Cannot operate since the file is corrupted. A file that cannot be set is selected. Because the file is invalid, cannot be displayed/played/saved. The file is too big to attach to mail. Since the file protected with copyright protection technology is included in the folder, animation cannot be created. Select a file with no restrictions. This is displayed when incoming mail with a file attached is forwarded. Perform attaching operation in order to attach the file. File name has not been entered. After entering file name, try again. The file cannot be attached since it will exceed the size of mail that can be sent. This file format is not supported in this FOMA phone. The folder cannot be created since there is already a folder with the same name. Change the name. Reference P202 P150 P169, 170, 174 A p p e n d x i Next Page 303 Appendix Message Can't rename folder. Folder already exists. Cannot delete folder Incorrect folder name Cannot create folder Can't create folder any more Bookmark is full. Select item to delete Cannot add bookmark No bookmarks Unknown browser error Invalid content Total size is too big Your data will be lost. Quit?
A p p e n d x i Cancel editing?
Home page not set. 304 Description The folder cannot be created since there is already a folder with the same name. Change the name. Mail is saved in the folder, so the folder cannot be deleted. Delete the folder after deleting all the mail in the folder. A character invalid for a folder name is included. The maximum number of folders are created, so cannot create any more. Delete unnecessary folders and try again. An error occurred so the folder was not created. The maximum number of data items are bookmarked, so cannot bookmark any more. Delete unnecessary bookmarks by selecting Yes. An error occurred, so could not bookmark. Bookmark not registered. Register bookmark beforehand. An unknown error occurred. Invalid page, so cannot be displayed. Total page size exceeded the maximum size, so it cannot be received successfully. You are about to terminate without saving the edited contents such as phonebook entries by pressing A or Q. Select "Yes" to terminate without saving the contents. You are about to terminate without saving the edited contents. If you do not want to save it, select Yes. To continue editing, select No. Home is not set. Perform the operation after setting Home. Reference P141 P141,161, 168 P121 P130 P128 Appendix Message Home page disable Save failed. No messages No save area Message too long Cannot enter Message too long No space to attach signature Message too long End of message will be deleted Cannot edit message Manner mode Play with sound?
Play with sound?
Outbox or Unsent message is full Description The URL registered in Home is not entered correctly. Perform the operation after entering it correctly. An error occurred, so could not save. No unsent mail messages saved. Cannot save because there is no room available in the storage area. Delete unnecessary files. Cannot enter because the text size exceeded 70 full-pitch characters or 160 half-pitch characters when an SMS message was transmitted. The mail size exceeds 5,000 full-pitch characters if a signature is pasted, so it cannot be pasted. Make the text of the message shorter or delete attached data to reduce the size down to less than 5,000 full-pitch characters. The mail size exceeds 5,000 full-pitch characters if a signature is pasted, so it cannot be pasted. Make the text of the message shorter or delete attached data to reduce the size down to less than 5,000 full-pitch characters. When received mail is replied to with quote or forwarded, the message will exceed 5,000 full-pitch characters, so the last part of the message will be truncated. The text cannot be entered because data equivalent to the size of 5,000 full-pitch characters is attached to the mail. The FOMA phone is set to manner mode. When you play the streaming file with sound, select Yes. The FOMA phone is set to manner mode. Select "Yes" to play sound of moving images or a melody. Cannot save the mail because the unsent message is full. Delete the unnecessary unsent mail. Reference P128 P156 P156 P148 A p p e n d x i Next Page 305 Appendix Message Description There's empty input. Input required There are items not entered. Perform the operation after entering these items. Empty message cannot be saved Cannot be saved because nothing is entered to address/subject/text field and no file is attached to the message. There is an error in the received data, so it cannot be displayed. The received data will be destroyed. A 3-digit number is displayed in (XXX). Invalid data. Data size is not supported. Invalid data. Data size is not supported. (XXX) Nuisance call barring service denied Failed to copy mail address Please make sure "Receive option"
in "Mail Settings" is turned ON Message data is broken 10 files limit for message Folder is full A p p e n d x i Message data is broken No messages F No messages R 306 The Nuisance call barring service is not subscribed to so it cannot be set. In order to use this feature, please subscribe to the Nuisance call barring service. Failed to copy the mail address because an error occurred in the data of the mail address during the copy operation to the phonebook. The Receive Option setting is set to "OFF". Change the setting to "ON"
and try again. An error occurred so the mail cannot be displayed or created. The maximum number of files attachable to mail is exceeded. The maximum number of files that can be attached to mail is 10. Inbox is full, so no new message can be received. Delete unnecessary received mails. The message data is corrupted and cannot be displayed. There is no MessageF saved. There is no MessageR saved. Reference P149 P202 P154 P150 P141 Appendix Message Memory full Not enough memory Can't save Not enough memory Exceeds limit. Unable to paste all letters. Paste?
Exceeds limit. Unable to paste. Not enough memory Please delete some files Description Because the memory of the FOMA phone is full, the data received by Infrared communication or moving images cannot be saved. Perform the operation after deleting unnecessary data. Because the memory is full, the shot still images cannot be saved. Because the memory is full, the edited still images cannot be saved. Because there is not enough memory, each function cannot be started. Because there is not enough memory, no still images can be taken. Because the number of characters transmittable is exceeded, the end of text will be truncated. Select "Yes" to send. Because the maximum number of characters is exceeded, part of the text could not be pasted. Select "Yes" to paste the portion that can be pasted. Because the maximum number of characters is exceeded, the text cannot be pasted. Perform the operation after deleting unnecessary text by pressing Q. The memory is full. After deleting the unnecessary files, try again. Reference P68,121, 168, 169, 175 P168, 169, 175 A p p e n d x i Next Page 307
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2007-02-20 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | Original Equipment |
2 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2007-02-20
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
LG Electronics USA
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0023476120
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
1000 Sylvan Avenue
|
||||
1 2 |
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey 07632
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
r******@pctestlab.com
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
1 2 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
BEJ
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
L602I
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
K**** H****
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Director, Standards & Compliance
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
201-4********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
201-8********
|
||||
1 2 |
k******@lge.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
PCTEST Engineering Lab., Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
R**** O********
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
6660-B Dobbin Road
|
||||
1 2 |
Columbia, Maryland 21045
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 |
r******@pctestlab.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 06/21/2007 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||||
1 2 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | PCS GSM Phone | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Power output listed is EIRP. SAR compliance for body-worn operation is based on a separation distance of 1.5 cm between the unit and the body of the user. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Belt clips or holsters not listed in this filing may not contain metallic components. The highest reported SAR values are: Head: 0.634 W/kg; Body-worn: 0.348 W/kg. This device also contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. | ||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
ESTECH Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
Y**** J******
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 2 |
j******@estech.co.kr
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 24E | 1850.20000000 | 1909.80000000 | 1.4130000 | 2.5000000000 ppm | 249KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15B |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC